CANON HV20 E (iPAL) Parts List, Service Manual

R2:CONFIDENTIAL Video Product
HV20 E
No. D16-2016, D16-2015 Digital Video Camera
iPAL
c CANON INC. 2007
Canon Inc. Digital Imaging Products Service & Quality Assurance Dept. First Edition : Mar. 2007 First Print : Mar. 2007
GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

CONTENTS
1. Product Overview -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 1-1 Development Concept ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 1-2 Product Specifications ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 1-3 Function and Performance List --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 2. Performance --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9 3. System Diagram -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 27
HV20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1. Product Overview
1-1 Development Concept
Full-spec HD camera system
Superior technology that supports HD with its high image quality
HD video lens
Canon HD CMOS
DIGIC DV II
Super-range OIS
Hi-speed AF (Instant AF)
Stylish design and elegantly simple operation. The full-spec HD camcorder. Stylish design and elegantly simple operation. The full-spec HD camcorder.
A horizontal stylish design and elegantly simple operational feel
A fuller array of functions
Easy to carry around, uncomplicated and easy to use
HDMI incorporated
Advanced accessory shoe
Audio functions
How the HV20 E has evolved from the HV10 E

HDMI incorporated
Straightforward connection involving the hookup of one cable
Advanced accessory shoe & audio functions featured

*Advanced accessory shoe featured
Video light, flash unit and directional microphone supported
*A fuller range of audio functions

Manual VR, level meter and headphones supported
Elegantly simple operation achieved by a horizontal stylish design *Elegantly simple operation
Zoom/trigger key (LCD panel), joystick (rear panel) and dedicated focusing dial provided
*Shooting for extended periods of time

Actual shooting of a whole tape (60 minutes) enabled by new high-capacity battery
And for good measure, theres also the HDV (PF25) setting and cinema mode setting *Cinema mode that users will find easy to use
(Perfect for the more mature users who used to take 8 mm movies years ago!)
... See technical description
1-2 Product Specifications

Specifications Image sensing device Total pixels Movie effective pixels (HD/DV widescreen) Still image effective pixels (4:3) Optical zoom magnification AF Digital zoom Image stabilizer LCD monitor EVF Memory card Still image recording size Still image recording Movie recording Compatible printers Advanced shoe CINE mode New video recording standards (Progressive Frame setting) Still image file transfer Streaming USB compatibility Down-converting White LED Built-in flash Search Terminals USB only IEEE 1394 (MPEG2TS/DV) USB 2.0 FULL Speed PTP supported (Both analog and digital) Mini video light (high-brightness white LED included) (Light switch provided) (Light guide flash) Date search, END search AV (AV mini terminal), HDV/DV, USB : Input/output HDMI terminal/Component terminal : output only Headphone terminal (also serves as AV mini terminal)/mic terminal Analog Digital conversion AV IEEE 1394 Battery included with unit BP-2L13 [HDV (PF25)] 10 Hi-Speed AF (INSTANT AF) 40/200 for tapes (No magnification when cards are used) Optical image stabilizer (shift type), Super range support 2.7-inch wide-screen LCD with approx. 211,000 pixels and AR coating 0.27-inch, 123,000 pixel widescreen color viewfinder miniSD 2048 1536 (4:3), 1920 1080 (16:9), 1440 1080, 640 480 Progressive photos (JPEG compression) PictBridge-compliant printers only Approx. 2.76 million HV20 E 1/2.7-inch CMOS sensor, RGB primary color filter Approx. 2.96 million Approx. 2.07 million
1-3 Function and Performance List

Item Camera Image sensing device (CMOS) Image size System (Filter) Total pixels Number of effective pixels Tape 1/2.7 model RGB primary color filter Approx. 2.96 million (1994 [H] 1484 [V]) In HDV/DV wide mode : Approx. 2.07 million (1920 [H] 1080 [V]) In DV normal mode : Approx. 1.55 million (1440 [H] 1080[V]) Card Lens Nominal focal length Optical zoom magnification Digital zoom magnification Magnifi -cation System Tape Card Tape Card f/number Aperture leaves (Number of leaves) Zoom speed Filter diameter Noise reduction Camera Tape Card Movie 4:3 : Approx. 2.76 million (1920 [H] 1440 [V]) 6.1 - 61mm 10 40/200 None Memory readout --f/1.8 - 3.0 when tapes are used, f/2.8 - 3.0 when cards are used 2 leaves Continuously varying speed 43mm P0.75 Either NR or Y/C-NR None HV20 E
Still image Chroma-only, median filter Recorder Minimum illumination Auto mode (with auto slow shutter selected) Night mode Image stabilizer Image stabilization system Sensing method 0.2 lx Optical system (lens shift) Angle detection and sensor-based movement vector detection (super range supported) Shooting functions AE mode Program AE AUTO, [P], (P, Av, Tv, CINE, SCN (Portrait, Sports, Night, Snow, Beach, Sunset, Spotlight, Fireworks)) CINE mode is effective only while the camera is in the tape mode. Metering system Tape Center-weighted average metering Evaluative metering (128 segments) No metering Card Evaluative metering (128 segments) No metering Metering options Fireworks AUTO, P, Av, Tv, Portrait, Sports, Night, Snow, Beach, Sunset, Spotlight, Fireworks Fireworks Av, Tv, P mode (Selectable from evaluative metering, center-weighted average metering, and spot metering) AF frame linkage Not possible SCN (Snow, Beach, Spotlight, Sunset) AUTO, P, Av, Tv, Portrait, Sports, Night C-NR system 2.5 lx

Item Shooting functions Exposure AE lock Included. Operated using joystick (prohibited during AUTO and fireworks mode) AE shift None (However, the custom brightness adjustment in the image effects can be made) Exposure compensation Supported. compensation is possible by moving the joystick (11 steps). Gain setting/Higher sensitivity Backlight correction Shutter speed Shutter speed setting (in Tv mode) Tape AUTO (BLC button) 9 levels (1/6, 1/12.5*, 1/25, 1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 sec.) * : Display shows 1/12 (excluding when HDV (PF25) mode is set) Card 9 levels (1/2, 1/3, 1/6, 1/12.5 *, 1/25, 1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500 sec.) * : Display shows 1/12 AUTO Tape 1/50 to 1/500sec. (with auto slow shutter OFF), 1/25 to 1/500sec. (with auto slow shutter ON) (excluding when HDV (PF25) mode is set) Card 1/25 to 1/500sec. (with auto slow shutter OFF), 1/12.5* to 1/500sec. (with auto slow shutter ON) * : Display is 1/12 Night Aperture value (aperture value settings in Av mode : in tape camera mode) Auxiliary light Flash Video light (external) Mini video light (high-brightness white LED included) Image quality adjustment White balance Image effects functions Custom functions Auto Preset System Focus Mode MF operation Range-finding frame display Tape Card Assist functions Zoom Speed 1/2 to 1/500sec. (Tape/Card) F1.8, 2.0, 2.4, 2.8, 3.4, 4.0, 4.8, 5.6, 6.7, 8.0 (Card recording : F2.8, 3.4, 4.0, 4.8, 5.6, 6.7, 8.0) Built-in Support Built-in (when flash is used, red eye reduction function is provided; low-luminance AF auxiliary light; manual on switch is provided) (Vivid, Neutral, Low Sharpening, Soft Skin Detail) (Brightness, Contrast, Sharpness, Color Depth) Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten, Fluorescent, Fluorescent H TTL, 128 segments AF(Hi-Speed/Normal )/MF, forced infinity Operated by rotating the dial None Available, Ai, AF (9-point focusing frame) and center selectable Available (enlargement, peaking) Supports variable speed (15 steps), selectable from Variable speed, SPEED3, SPEED2, and SPEED1. Digital effects Movie Auto fade, Wipe, Black & White, Sepia, Art HV20 E
Still image Black & White, Sepia Card Mix Multi-screen Movie shooting Tape Card None None miniDV Not supported

Item Shooting functions Still image recording (Still images cannot be recorded to tape) AEB Photo button Form Recording system Single shooting Continuous shooting Progressive photo Normal continuous shooting and high-speed continuous shooting can be set. Exposure compensation amount (steps of 0, -0.5, +0.5) Dedicated still image button L (2048 1536), LW (1920 1080), M (1440 1080), S (640 480), SW (848 480) Image quality External flash support Frame processing Negative-positive reversal Zebra pattern Color bar Self-timer Interval timer Clear scan Memory card REC search REC review Standby switch Quick Start Power saving function (after recording has been continuously paused for 5 minutes) Displayed text recording Audio Tape DV recording 16-bit 2 channels (48kHz) or 12-bit 4 channels (32kHz) : 4-channel synchronous recording not possible HDV recording Card Wind screen EVF Size Pixels Brightness adjustment Color adjustment Movable LCD monitor Screen size Pixels Brightness adjustment Backlight switching MPEG-1 Audio Layer II : 4-channel synchronous recording not possible AUTO or OFF (selected on a menu) 0.27-inch (wide-screen color LCD RGB delta arrangement) Approx. 123.000 pixels 2.7-inch wide-screen color LCD Approx. 211.000 pixels (When the battery pack installed: Normal/Bright switching) Bright is the default setting when the CA-570 is connected. Movable Mirror shooting supported Super Fine, Fine, Normal (VFL-1), EOS flash unit not supported 10 sec./Remote controller : 2sec. miniSD memory card only Power shutoff (when battery pack installed) Pressed halfway down Included Recorded image size HV20 E

Item VCR Playback system Frame playback Slow playback (1/3 speed) 2 speed playback 1 speed playback Cue/Review Search Photo search Date search Index search End search Playback effects Playback zoom (5 zoom) D. EFFECT Tape Card Multi-screen Data code display DV recording : Forward/Reverse, HDV recording : Forward only DV recording : Forward/Reverse, HDV recording : Forward only DV recording : Forward/Reverse, HDV recording : none DV recording : Forward/Reverse, HDV recording : Forward/Reverse DV recording : 9.5 speed, HDV recording : 8 speed (In tape playback and card still image playback) Auto fade, Wipe, Black & White, Sepia, Art Date, Time, Date and time, Camera data display, Histogram (in still image mode) Card Slide show Playback frame jump Audio dubbing AV insert Zero set memory Editing functions Simple editing Special effects (10 or 100 shots/page jumping (with indexing)) HV20 E

Item System Interface (terminals) External microphone terminal Headphone terminal HDV/DV terminal S-Video jack AV mini-terminal Editing terminal (LANC terminal) Component terminals HDMI terminal USB terminal (mini-B Receptacle) Memory card file transfer Analog to digital signal conversion Direct Print Print/Share button My Camera Microphone attenuation Microphone level meter World clock (AV mini-terminal) (Input/Output switching) AV mini-terminal, used for both input and output Output only Output only (USB 2.0 Full Speed) (USB file transfer only) (HDV/DV terminal) (only PictBridge-compatible printers such as PIXUS 80i, iP8600) (Date display (Japanese, North American, or European style can be selected)) Text titles Speaker Alerting tone Tally lamp Remote control sensor Accessory shoe Video ID Illuminated key Custom key Night mode key DV control Internal battery charging Backup power supply Battery pack power (WL-D87) Advanced accessory shoe (EOS flash unit not supported) (CA-570) Built-in (rechargeable lithium battery) NB-2L, NB-2LH, BP-2L12, BP-2L13 and BP-2L14 lithium ion batteries HV20 E
External View
138mm 88mm
80mm
Fig. 1
2. Performance
1 Type 2 Recording system 2-1 Video recording standards HDV VCR-integrated camera Two rotating heads, helical scan azimuth recording HDV1080i (1080/50i) (Compression method : MPEG-2 Video [MP@ H-14]) [50i recording also in the HDV (PF25) mode] DV standards (consumer VCR, SD specifications) (Digital component recording) Compliant with PAL system, 1080/50i 8 bits
DV Video signals Quantized bits 2-2 Audio signal recording DV
PCM digital recording (48kHz 16-bit recording or 32kHz 12-bit recording selectable) (4-channel synchronous recording not possible)
HDV
MPEG-1 Audio Layer II (Sampling frequency : 48kHz 16-bit recording; bit rate : 384kbps) (4-channel synchronous recording not possible)
2-3 Tracking 2-4 Tape speed 2-5 Head drum Drum diameter Rpms Heads
2-frequency pilot system Approx. 18.83mm/sec. (HDV/DV : in SP mode) Approx. 12.57mm/sec. (HDV/DV : in LP mode) 21.7mm 9000 rotations/minute Video heads : 2

3 Recording/playback time Max. 80 minutes (HDV/DV : in SP mode) Max. 120 minutes (DV : in LP mode) Continuous battery shooting time/Actual shooting time, Continuous playback time Normal in *1 refers to the LCD brightness at the Normal setting, and Bright in *2 refers to the LCD brightness at the Bright setting. The times listed in the table below are approximations only. In HDV recording mode When viewfinder is used Continuous shooting NB-2L 55min Actual shooting 30min 55min (Normal*1) 50min (Bright*2) NB-2LH 70min 40min 65min (Normal) 65min (Bright) BP-2L12 120min 70min 110min (Normal) 105min (Bright) BP-2L13 120min 75min 115min (Normal) 110min (Bright) BP-2L14 150min 85min 140min (Normal) 135min (Bright) In DV recording mode When viewfinder is used Continuous shooting NB-2L 65min Actual shooting 35min 60min (Normal*1) 55min (Bright*2) NB-2LH 80min 45min 75min (Normal) 75min (Bright) BP-2L12 130min 75min 125min (Normal) 120min (Bright) BP-2L13 140min 80min 135min (Normal) 125min (Bright) BP-2L14 165min 95min 155min (Normal) 150min (Bright) 4 Compatible cassette tape Mini DVC specs 4-1 Tape type 4-2 Tape width 4-3 Tape thickness 35min (Normal) 30min (Bright) 45min (Normal) 40min (Bright) 75min (Normal) 70min (Bright) 75min (Normal) 75min (Bright) 90min (Normal) 85min (Bright) 195min (Normal) 165min (Normal) 155min (Normal) 95min (Normal) 75min (Normal) Continuous shooting When LCD monitor is used Actual shooting Continuous playback 30min (Normal) 30min (Bright) 35min (Normal) 35min (Bright) 65min (Normal) 65min (Bright) 70min (Normal) 65min (Bright) 80min (Normal) 80min (Bright) 175min (Normal) 145min (Normal) 140min (Normal) 85min (Normal) 70min (Normal) Continuous shooting When LCD monitor is used Actual shooting Continuous playback
Vapor-deposited metal tape 6.35mm 7m or 5.3m
10

5 Camera 5-1 Image sensing device 5-1-1 Pixels Total pixels 5-1-2 Number of effective pixels Card recording 4:3 mode Approx. 2.76 million 1920 (H) 1440 (V) 5-1-3 Filter 5-1-4 Signal configuration 5-1-5 Scanning system 5-1-6 Minimum subject illumination Auto mode Night mode 5-1-7 Subject illumination range 5-2 Photo lens 5-2-1 Nominal focal length Zoom magnification (with tape/with card) 35mm film equivalent value Card recording 4:3 mode Approx. 40.0 - 400mm 5-2-2 5-2-3 5-2-4 5-2-5 5-2-6 Nominal diameteric ratio Lens configuration Focus adjustment Minimum object distance Power zoom 16:9 mode Approx. 43.6 - 436mm 16:9 mode Approx. 2.07 million 1920 (H) 1080 (V)
1/2.7-inch CMOS image sensor Approx. 2.96 million (1994 [H] 1484 [V])
Tape recording DV (Normal) mode Approx. 1.55 million 1440 (H) 1080 (V) HD/DV (Wide) mode Approx. 2.07 million 1920 (H) 1080 (V)
RGB primary color filter Compliant with PAL system, 1080/50i Progressive Approx.2.5 lx (shutter speed 1/25sec.) (with auto slow shutter ON) Approx.0.2 lx (shutter speed 1/2sec.) Approx.0.2 lx to 100,000 lx 6.1 - 61mm Optical 10 zoom
Tape recording DV (Normal) mode Approx. 53 - 530mm HD/DV (Wide) mode Approx. 43.6 - 436mm
Zoom speed
5-2-7 Focal length display 5-2-8 Macro mechanism Macro shooting distance 5-2-9 Filter diameter 5-2-10 Accessory lens, filter 5-2-11 Lens hood 5-2-12 Lens cap 5-3 Digital zoom Card recording Magnification No function 5-4 Image stabilization function Image stabilization system Camera shake detection system
1.8-3.0 ... In tape mode 11 elements in 9 groups, using two aspherical surfaces (two aspherical lenses) Inner focus type. Manually adjustable (by operating focus button) 10mm (AF linked; wide end), 1m for full zoom area (from lens tip) Variable (15-step) power zoom. Slide lever operation. Zoom speed can be adjusted by moving slide lever. Manual zoom not possible (No zoom ring). Selectable from Variable Speed, SPEED3, SPEED2, SPEED1. Maximum speed at variable speed (W <=> T) : Approx. 1.3sec. at PAUSE, approx. 2.3sec. during REC Minimum speed at variable speed (W <=> T) : Approx. 37sec. during PAUSE/REC Approx. 4.5sec. at SPEED3, approx. 8.7sec. at SPEED2, and approx. 16.2sec. at SPEED1 None. Includes simple zoom display in viewfinder/LCD monitor. Wide end macro 10mm (from lens front) 43mm P0.75 The following can be used : WD-H43 ( 0.7), TL-H43 ( 1.7), FS-43U/FS-43U II None Built-in type (electrically opened and closed)
Tape recording Magnification Up to 40/200 Included (supported in both tape and card modes) Optical system (lens shift) Angular velocity sensing (using piezoelectric vibration sensor) and super range by sensor-based movement vector detection supported. Forcibly set to ON in AUTO mode.
11

5-5 Shooting modes Tape mode
Card mode
Movies compliant with the HDV/DV standard are recorded on miniDV cassettes (still images cannot be recorded on tapes). In addition, when a miniSD memory card is installed, still images are recorded on the memory card while movies are recorded on the tape. However, still images cannot be shot when line signals are input. (Refer to the memory card system.) Still images (JPEG compression) are recorded on a miniSD memory card (refer to memory card system). Movie recording on a card is not available. AUTO, P ( P, Tv, Av, CINE*), SCN (Portrait, Sports, Night, Snow, Beach, Sunset, Spotlight, Fireworks) * The CINE mode is effective only while the camera is in the tape camera mode. Here, the program AE mode is automatically set when the user has switched the camera over to the card mode while the cinema mode was set in the tape mode. Center-weighted average : AUTO, P, Av, Tv, CINE, Portrait, Sports, Night 128-segment evaluative metering (16H 8V) : Snow, Beach, Sunset modes, and Spotlight No metering : SCN (Fireworks)...(Fixed exposure: 1/50) 128-segment evaluative metering (16H 8V) : AUTO, P, Av, Tv, Portrait, Sports, Night, Snow, Beach, Sunset, Spotlight No metering : SCN (Fireworks)...Fixed exposure : 2sec. Selectable from 128-segment evaluative metering, center-weighted average metering, and spot metering : Av, Tv, and P (evaluative metering is the default for theses). Exposure locked by moving the joystick. After the exposure is locked, it can be corrected by moving the joystick (except in the AUTO, Fireworks mode) 11 levels (-11 to 0 to +11, 2.75EV) Indicated as number in the viewfinder (0 to 11). Function initiated by operating the BLC (Backlight Correction) button to prevent the main subject from appearing too dark when it is shot with a high-brightness subject (such as the sun) in the background.
5-6 Exposure control 5-6-1 Program AE
5-6-2 Metering system Tape recording
Card recording
5-6-3 Exposure compensation function Exposure lock Exposure compensation amount Back light correction
5-6-4 Electronic shutter 5-6-4-1 AUTO mode HDV/DV mode
5-6-4-2
5-6-4-3
5-6-4-4 5-6-4-5
Tape : 1/25 to 1/500sec. (With auto slow shutter ON) 1/50 to 1/500sec. (With auto slow shutter OFF) Card : 1/12.5* to 1/500sec. (With auto slow shutter ON) * : Displayed as 1/12sec. 1/25 to 1/500sec. (With auto slow shutter OFF) HDV (PF25) mode 1/25 to 1/500sec.(With auto slow shutter OFF) 1/12 to 1/500sec. (With auto slow shutter ON) Av mode Aperture setting Tape : f/1.8, 2.0, 2.4, 2.8, 3.4, 4.0, 4.8, 5.6, 6.7, 8.0 Card : f/2.8, 3.4, 4.0, 4.8, 5.6, 6.7, 8.0 Tv mode Shutter setting Tape recording : 1/6, 1/12.5*, 1/25, 1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000sec. (HDV/DV mode) *Displayed as 1/12 1/6, 1/12, 1/25, 1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000sec. (HDV (PF25) mode) Card recording : 1/2, 1/3, 1/6, 1/12.5*, 1/25, 1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500sec. *Displayed as 1/12 Night mode Both Tape and Card : 1/2 to 1/500sec. Other modes P, Sports, Snow, Beach, Sunset mode HDV/DV mode : same as Auto Slow Shutter Off in AUTO mode. HDV (PF25) mode : 1/25 to 1/500sec. Portrait : Tape : HDV/DV mode : 1/50 to 1/1000sec. HDV (PF25) mode : 1/25 to 1/1000sec. : Card : 1/25 to 1/500sec. Spotlight : Tape : HDV/DV mode : 1/50sec. HDV (PF25) mode : 1/25 to 1/50sec. : Card : 1/25 to 1/100sec. Fireworks : Tape : Tape, 1/50sec. only : Card : 2sec. only
12

5-7 AF 5-7-1 System
Hybrid AF (TTL-video signal detection system and external phase difference metering system) and Normal AF (TTL-video signal detection system) selectable (MENU settings). Setting possible for card or tape. The hybrid AF is referred to as Hi-Speed AF for the DOM models and Instant AF for the overseas models. Screen center Selection of Ai (artificial intelligence) AF function where the camera Automatically selects from 9 range-finding frames on the screen, the screen center function where the range-finding is fixed at the center frame or OFF possible (9-point range-finding selection AF not possible) Only AiAF in AUTO mode. None Appears. AF frame designated for focusing (fixed at center or AF frame selected by AiAF lights up green). The AF frame appears yellow when the subject cannot be brought into focus or for Tv mode and Night mode with a shutter speed of 1/2 second or more to less than 1/6 second. 10mm to infinity (at wide end); 1m to infinity in full zoom area (from lens front) Approx. 50 lx to 100,000 lx Switching between continuous AF and manual focusing enabled by operating the focus button. Operation is not possible in the Auto mode. During manual focus, the [MF] indicator appears in the viewfinder. MF adjustments are performed by rotating the dial. Switching between INSTANT AF and normal AF enabled by a menu setting. Even in INSTANT AF mode, the control exercised during actual recording differs from REC pause/no tape mode. In REC pause/no tape mode, AF control which gives priority to the response characteristics is exercised to enable the focusing status to be achieved instantly. During actual recording, on the other hand, AF control which gives priority to stability and natural focusing is exercised to enable the subjects that in an instant cut across the width of length of the screen, for instance, to be focused. In addition, a focusing sound is heard when the AC adapter is connected in no tape mode. Holding down the Focus button (approx. 2 seconds or more) sets to Infinity and displays [ ] in the viewfinder. Provided; The function enlarges the image displayed on the LCD (it is approximately doubled in size) or it emphasis the images outlines (peaking) to facilitate the focusing process when the focus assist button is operated during manual focusing. The function is released under the following conditions : When recording is started, when rec review is initiated, when the MENU or FUNC. menu is opened, when zooming, when switching between tape and card mode, when the power supply is switched on or off. 0.27-inch wide-screen color LCD (approx. 123,000 pixels) ON when LCD monitor closed (panel facing inwards) and during mirror shooting Not possible Not possible +1.5 to -5.5 diopter (when eye is at eyepiece) 1-lens configuration
5-7-2 AF range finding area In tape mode In card mode
5-7-3 Range-finding frame display In Tape mode In Card mode
5-7-4 AF operating range 5-7-5 AF operation illumination range 5-7-6 AF mode switching
5-7-7 Forced infinity setting 5-7-8 Focus assist
5-8 Viewfinder 5-8-1 5-8-2 5-8-3 5-8-4 Rotation Detaching eyepiece Diopter movement range Lens configuration
13

5-9 LCD panel 2.7-inch wide-screen color LCD (approx. 210,000 pixels) TFT active-matrix drive. RGB delta arrangement; ON when LCD monitor not closed (when panel faces outwards) Angle adjustment Possible; Monitoring is possible for high-angle, low-angle, and mirror shooting. Information display Color display of operating mode, simple zoom position, remaining battery charge, remaining tape, time code, warnings and other indications. 17 languages supported German, English, Spanish, French, Italian, Polish, Rumanian, Turkish, Russian, Ukrainian, Arabic, Persian, Thai, Chinese (simplified), Chinese (traditional), Korean, Japanese. A limited number of indicators are displayed during mirror shooting. Backlight adjustment Enabled by holding down DISP. button (for about 2 seconds). The setting switches between Bright to Normal each time the button is pressed. The default setting during battery operation is Normal. The default setting during compact power adapter (CA) operation is Bright. If the power supply is switched from battery operation to CA operation while the power is on, the setting made during CA operation is used (CA operation default setting is used if no setting was made). In the same way, if the power supply is switched from CA operation to battery operation while the power is on, the setting made during battery operation is used (battery operation default setting is used if no setting was made). Relationship between LCD monitor and viewfinder Camera/Camera Card mode LCD panel Panel closed (panel facing inwards) Panel closed (panel facing outwards) Panel open Mirror shooting *1 OFF ON ON ON Viewfinder ON OFF OFF ON VCR/Card Playback mode LCD panel OFF ON ON ON Viewfinder ON OFF OFF OFF
5-9-1 5-9-2
5-9-3
5-9-4
*1 : When taking self-portraits (using the mirror), only the self-timer display is enlarged and displayed. 5-10 White balance adjustment TTL 128-segments, new white extraction system FAWB. Auto/Set/Preset. Six presets are available : Daylight : 5,400K; Shade : 8,000-8,500K; Cloudy : 6,000K; Tungsten (incandescent lamps and halogen bulbs) : 3,000K; Fluorescent H (3-wavelength type fluorescent) : 6,500K; Fluorescent (white fluorescent) : 4,000K. Presets are not possible in SNC and AUTO modes. 2,800K to 8,000K Audio Synchronized Fader, [F1] : auto fade (domestic models: fade to white; overseas models : fade to black), [F2] : wipe Approx. 4sec. [E] [E1] : Black & White; [E2] : Sepia; [E3] : Art (While recording on a card, only effects [E1] (black & white) and [E2] (sepia) are available.) Effect function is turned ON and OFF by operating the joystick. No function No function Stereo (using electret condenser microphone) Included. With AUTO/OFF switch (Menu selection. Available for built-in microphone only.) Pre-flash light adjustment system Auto flash, auto flash with Red-eye Reduction, manual flash, flash off Flash on : Firing at 1/500sec. or less in card camera mode W-end : Approx.50cm to 2.8m. T-end : Approx.to 2.7m. Approx. 1 to 2m in the instruction manual Includes mini video light (equipped with high-brightness white LED) with light button. Enables shooting at distances of approx. 1.5m in AUTO mode. Firing initiated by operating the light button. The AF auxiliary light is set to Auto when the light button is pressed, still image camera AF auxiliary light AUTO is selected and when the Red-eye Reduction function is selected. The AF auxiliary light is OFF in Fireworks mode.
Adjustment range 5-11 Digital effects function 5-11-1 Fader [F] Fade time 5-11-2 Effects
5-11-3 Multi-screen 5-11-4 Card Mix 5-12 Built-in microphone Wind screen function 5-13 Built-in flash 5-13-1 Flash mode 5-13-2 Shutter speed 5-13-3 Shooting distance 5-14 Auxiliary light source
Lighting mode
14

5-15 Other additional functions 5-15-1 Time code
5-15-2 Data code Date and time
Camera data
Tape recording Card recording
Displays recording time (0:00:00 to 23:59:59:24) and records in sub-code area. If different recording modes (HDV and DV) are used in one recording session, the timecode will not be continued between the modes. The date and camera information during recording are automatically recorded and can be displayed during playback. Automatic calendar range : January 1, 2007, through December 31, 2030 (the initial setting is January 1, 2007) The date/time display (year/month/day) can be selected from Japanese, American, and European styles. World clock support (Select the name of your destination city and the date and time are automatically adjusted to the local date and time. Supports daylight saving time.) During playback, time can be displayed in three different modes (date only, time and date, or time only). (Time and date can be displayed for January 1, 1990, through December 31, 2089.) Dates and times cannot be displayed concurrently with the camera data. Shutter speed and aperture value information are recorded, and can be displayed during playback. The following information can be displayed: shooting mode during shooting, pixel size, metering, white balance, image quality effects, manual focusing (manual AF), flash information, file size, exposure compensation value, f/number, shutter speed, etc. Only the items which support self-recording are displayed. Information can be displayed or not displayed by operating the DISP. button.
5-15-3 Accessory shoe 5-15-4 REC Search function 5-15-5 Rec review function 5-15-6
5-15-7 5-15-8 5-15-9
Advanced accessory shoe (EOS flash unit not supported) No function Supported; accessed by initiating the Recording Check operation (using the joystick) when camera recording is paused; playback in the forward direction only. Zero set memory Supported. This function allows you to rewind or fast-forward the tape to the position where the WL-D87 Zero Set Memory key is pressed (the counter value is set to 0:00:00). (During recording, only zero setting is allowed. This function can be used in Playback mode.) Remote control reception ON/OFF Possible. This can be done in Camera mode and VCR mode (by selecting from menu). Headphone volume adjustment Supported, Menu setting Widescreen shooting button Not available (the wide/normal setting for DV provided as a menu item) In Card Camera mode, the exposure compensation is automatically changed and recorded in 0 steps, -0.5 steps or +0.5 steps (when continuous shooting mode : AEB shooting is not possible. is selected). Flash
5-15-10 AEB shooting
5-15-11 Still image check time setting
5-15-12 Microphone attenuation 5-15-13 Microphone level meter 5-15-14 Image effects setting
5-15-15 Shooting assist a. Zebra b. Peaking 5-15-16 Marker displays
After pressing the photo button to cancel operation, the display time can be set for checking the still image. One of 6 settings; OFF (0 sec.), 2, 4, 6, 8 or 10 seconds can be selected as the setting mode. Supported; 20dB attenuation applied to built-in microphone, 24dB attenuation applied externally or to shoe microphone. Supported. (Joystick operation) The available image effect settings in the FUNC menu are Vivid, Neutral, Low Sharpening, Soft Skin Detail and Custom. These settings cannot be made in Special Scene mode. Vivid : Emphasizes contrast and color depth, and presents images with vibrant and striking colors. Neutral : Limits the contrast and color depth, and presents pure images without any enhancements. Low Sharpening : Provides image with less distinct outlines and a softer touch. Soft Skin Detail : Smoothes the outlines of skin sections, and presents skin sections with a softer tone. Custom : Enables adjustment of the brightness, contrast, sharpness, and color depth. Either of the two following displays can be set by a menu selection. Function for displaying a black-and-white zebra pattern on the high-brightness parts of the subject OFF, 100% or 70% selectable Function for emphasizing the image outlines and displaying the images with such outlines. Neither function has any effect on the video recording. Horizontal marker (white/gray) and grid (white/gray) displays (Menu selection).
15

6 Recorder section 6-1 Recording functions
Camera shooting and recording, HDV/DV input recording, analog input recording (AV miniterminal) 6-1-1 Recording standards DV/HDV standard (1080/50i) 6-1-2 Tape speed Approx. 18.83mm/sec. (HDV/DV : SP mode) Approx. 12.57mm/sec. (LP mode) 6-1-3 HDV/DV input video recording Complies with IEEE 1394 Records video/audio signals from a digital video camera connected through a DV cable. 6-1-4 Analog input recording Analog video/audio signals are recorded using the AV mini-jack. 6-1-5 Priority of terminals during recording HDV/DV terminal AV mini-terminal 6-2 Audio Dubbing Recording Not possible 6-3 Playback functions Standard Playback and Superb Playback 6-3-1 Standard Playback Video Images recorded under the DV/HDV (1080i) standard (playback of tapes with 1080/30P or 1080/ 25P recordings also possible) (Playback of tapes with HDV 720P recordings not possible) Audio DV standard playback 16-bit : 48kHz, 44.1kHz, 32kHz sampling frequencies supported 12-bit : 32kHz sampling frequency supported Stereo 1, Stereo 2, or mixed playback of Stereo 1 and Stereo 2 (mix ratio can be adjusted at the menu screen) HDV standard playback 2CH Supports MPEG-1 Audio Layer II 4CH Supports MPEG-2 Audio Layer II (4-channel playback of tapes containing 4-channel recordings possible) 6-3-2 Superb Playback DV recording and playback a. Fast playback b. Rewind playback c. Frame playback d. Slow playback e. 1 speed playback f. 2 speed playback HDV recording playback a. Fast-forward playback b. Rewind playback c. Frame playback d. Slow playback e. 1 speed playback 6-4 Tape fast-forward/rewind 6-5 Input signals 6-5-1 HDV/DV terminal 6-5-2 AV mini-terminal a. Video signals Impedance Signal level b. Audio signal Types of signals Impedance Signal level 6-5-3 Microphone terminal Impedance Signal level 6-5-4 USB port Plays video only Approx. 11.5 speed Approx. 11.5 speed Forward/reverse frame feeding Forward/reverse 1/3 speed Forward/reverse 1 speed Forward/reverse at 2 speed Approx. 8 speed Approx. 8 speed Forward only (reverse frame playback is performed by tape rewinding forward playback still operation) Forward only (approx. 1/3 speed) (Reverse slow playback is identical to reverse 1 playback.) Forward/reverse 1 speed Approx. 2 minutes and 20 seconds (using 60-minute tape) Compliant with IEEE 1394-AV/C protocol 3.5mm 4-pole mini-jack PAL standard color video signals 75 1 Vp-p (composite) Stereo audio signal Min. 40k -10dBv 3.5mm stereo mini-jack Min. 5k -57dBV (when using 600 microphone) mini-B Supports USB 2.0 Full Speed.
16

6-6 Output signals 6-6-1 HDV/DV terminal 6-6-2 AV mini-terminal a. Video signals Signal configuration Impedance Signal level Horizontal resolution Self recording/playback Camera EE OUT b. Audio signal Types of signals Impedance Signal level Frequency characteristic 6-6-3 Component terminals Types of signals Impedance Output signal level Horizontal resolution Self recording/playback Camera EE OUT Catalog value 6-6-4 HDMI terminal Types of signals 6-6-5 Headphone terminal Impedance Output signal level 6-6-6 USB port USB device class Compatible computer systems PC operating system
Special 4-pin (IEEE 1394 compatible); Compliant with IEEE 1394-AV/C protocol 3.5mm 4-pole mini-jack PAL standard color video signals 75 1 Vp-p (composite) Max. 530 TV lines (screen center) Catalog value : Approx. 530 TV lines (screen center) Stereo audio signal Max. 3k -10dBv (with 47k load) 60Hz to 16kHz (range between 1kHz reference 3dB) Special D terminal 1080i/576i supported 75 Y : 1 Vp-p PB /PR, CB/CR : 350m Vp-p Approx. 800 TV lines during HD (screen center), Approx. 530 TV lines during SD (screen center) Approx. 800 TV lines during HD (screen center), Approx. 530 TV lines during SD (screen center) Approx. 800 TV lines during HD, Approx. 530 TV lines during SD (screen center) Type A (19 pins) Output of signals matching the display unit connected to the HV20 E (576i /576P/1080i formats supported) 3.5mm stereo mini-jack (also serves as AV mini-terminal) 47 -25dBV (with 16 load at maximum volume) Supports USB 2.0 Full-Speed PTP class Windows : IBM PC/AT compatible, NEC PC98-NX Series Macintosh : Power Macintosh, PowerBook, iMac, iBook Windows : Windows 98 SE, Windows ME, Windows 2000, Windows XP Macintosh : Mac OS X 10.2.8 or later
17

6-7 Memory card system 6-7-1 Types of memory cards used 6-7-2 Recordable image types
MiniSD memory cards and memory cards supported Still images only (recorded with JPEG compression) (movies not possible) The recording pixel size for each mode appears as shown below and can be selected from the FUNC. menu. In either case, super fine, fine or normal can be selected as the image quality. Operation must be paused during tape playback. Also, still image recording is not possible when line signals are input. In tape or camera mode In HDV/DV (wide) mode LW (1920 1080) SW (848 480) DV (Normal) M (1440 1080) S (640 480) DV (Wide) playback SW (848 480) DV (Normal) playback S (640 480) In tape playback mode In HDV playback mode LW (1920 1080)
Card/Camera LW (1920 1080) L (2048 1536) M (1440 1080) S (640 480)
6-7-3 File name and folder name
Card volume label
Based on the DCF (Design Rule for Camera File System) rules and still image (Exif 2.2) file management specifications/DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) file management specifications, the following names are assigned to recorded cards after initializing in the Initialize menu. CANON DV Compression system JPEG No function JPEG TEXT TEXT //DCIM/xxxCANON/AUT_yyyy.JPG //MISC/AUTPRINT.MRK //MISC/AUTXFER.MRK Folder name and file name //DCIM/xxxCANON/IMG_yyyy.JPG
Types of files Still image (Exif 2.2) file PhotoStitch ZoomBrowser DPOF file DPOF automatic transmission file
xxx : Folder No., yyyy : File number, z : A to Z *1 : Comes from motion video file of same file No. DCF folder and file name //DCIM/xxxCANON/AUT_yyyy. JPG xxx : folder number; yyyy : file number File number Internal management is performed based on folder number-file number. Photographed images are assigned file numbers from 0001 to 9900, and are stored in folders (100 files to a folder). Each folder is assigned numbers 100 to 998. Relationship between folder No. and file No. Folder No. 101 102 198 200 998 9801 9802 9803 9899 9900 Photographed images start from 101-0101, and are basically numbered to be greater than Directory No. and File No. of files saved on Memory Cards. 9801 9802 9803 9899 9900 0001 0002 0003 0099 0100 Recording area of photographed image File No. 0101 0102 0103 0199 0200 0201 0202 0203 0299 0300 Saved files
18

6-7-4 Number of recorded images Still image Image size LW (1920 1080) L (2048 1536) M (1440 1080) SW (848 480) S (640 480) Image quality S. Fine Fine Normal S. Fine Fine Normal S. Fine Fine Normal S. Fine Fine Normal S. Fine Fine Normal 16MB 9 14 29 6 9 19 10 15 35 50 70 145 65 95 175 Number of recorded images (approximate) 32MB 20 30 60 10 20 40 25 40 80 105 155 310 140 205 375 64MB 40 65 130 25 40 85 55 85 170 225 320 640 295 425 770 128MB 90 135 265 60 85 180 120 180 350 455 650 1300 600 865 1560 256MB 175 265 520 115 175 350 235 350 690 895 1265 2535 1170 1690 3045 512MB 350 525 1040 235 350 700 470 700 1370 1775 2515 5030 2320 3355 6040 1GB 710 1055 2080 470 700 1400 940 1400 2745 3550 5035 *10070 4645 6715 *12085 2GB 1460 2190 4385 955 1425 2925 1920 2925 5585 7680 *10240 *20485 *10240 *15365 *30730 Data size /image Approx. 1360KB Approx. 910KB Approx. 460KB Approx. 2060KB Approx. 1380KB Approx. 690KB Approx. 1020KB Approx. 690KB Approx. 350KB Approx. 270KB Approx. 190KB Approx. 90KB Approx. 215KB Approx. 149KB Approx. 82KB
* Up to 9999 displayed. * The given number of recorded images is for reference only. The number varies greatly depending on the subject and other conditions when taking pictures. 6-7-5 Card initialization Cards must be initialized in the camera body. Operation is not guaranteed with PC initialization since problems can occur with some OS. Cards can be initialized in two ways, normal initialization and complete initialization. Normal initialization is used to initialize only the management area on the memory card. Since the data in the data region is not cleared, reading and writing the card data repeatedly tends to slow down the card access speed. This slowdown in the access speed is restored by complete initialization. All the data recorded on the card is erased by complete initialization so that the security aspect is also enhanced.
6-7-6 Usable memory cards miniSD memory card
SanDisk : 32MB, 64MB, 128MB, 256MB, 512MB, 1GB, 2GB Matsushita Electric : 16MB, 32MB, 64MB, 128MB, 256MB, 512MB, 1GB, 2GB Toshiba : 32MB, 64MB, 128MB, 256MB, 512MB, 1GB, 2GB Lexar : 64MB, 128MB, 256MB, 512MB, 1GB (However, this does not mean that the operation of all these memory cards is guaranteed.) MultiMediaCard Not supported 6-7-7 Number of continuous shots and number of stored continuous shots Number of continuous shots recorded per second High-speed continuous shooting (shots/sec) 5 images Normal continuous shooting (shots/sec) 3 images Built-in flash firing (frames per second) 2.1 images 60 images Maximum number of recordable shots
* The numbers of the stored continuous shots given are approximations only. The continuous shooting speed when using the built-in flash is as indicated above in both the Normal and High-speed continuous shooting modes, and the flash output is approx. 1/4 of the output level when single shots are taken. The number of images recorded when using the flash is identical to the number of recordable images in the table above.
19

6-8 D. Effect playback function 6-8-1 Fader [F] Fade time 6-8-2 Effects [E] 6-8-3 Multi-screen 6-8-4 Card Mix 6-8-5 Availability in operation mode
Audio synchronized fader. Same as in shooting mode, [F1] : auto fade (domestic models : fade to white; overseas models : fade to black), [F2] : wipe Approx. 4sec. Same as in shooting mode. [E1] : Black & White; [E2] : Sepia; [E3] : Art Effect function turned ON/OFF by moving the joystick. No function No function
Playback (VCR/Tape) Fader Effects Multi-screen Card Mix 6-9 Direct Print
Card playback (VCR/Card)
No function No function Connecting to a PictBridge-compatible ( ) printer using the IFC-300PCU interface cable in-
cluded with the video camera enables the still images recorded on memory cards to be easily printed out by means of control exercised from the video camera. 6-9-1 Printable images 6-9-2 Print layout 6-9-3 Trimming 6-9-4 Date printing 6-9-5 Number of print copies Only the still images which have been recorded on the miniSD memory cards. Single image (with borders, without borders), 2/4/8/9/16-image layout printing; subject to restrictions based on printer specifications and paper size. Possible Possible (depends on specifications of connected printer) Easy Print : 1 to 99 sheets DPOF printing : Max. 998 images, 1 to 99 each
Printer manufacturer Printer specifications CP specifications
Canon CP specifications +PictBridge specifications BJ Photo specifications only BJ specifications +PictBridge specifications
PIXUS 990i/900PD/ DS700/810
Other manufacturer PictBridge specifications only
Suitable printer Printer specifications when connected to HV20 E
CP-10/100
CP-200/3002nd/220/330/ BJ-895PD/535PD/F890PD, PIXUS450i/470PD/50i 400/500/600/710/510
Not supported
PictBridge specifications
Not supported
PictBridge control When the printer is connected
PictBridge control
PictBridge control
Paper setting Paper size Paper type Bordered/ Borderless 2/4/8/9/16 screen layout Image optimization Date printing Trimming
Printing functions
( ) ( ) ( )
(*1) ( ) ( )
(*1)
(*1) ( ) ( ) ( )
( ) : The printer is supported
The model names of supported printers are all Japanese model names. *1 : This depends on the printer specifications and paper size.
20

6-10 Other functions 6-10-1 Consecutive shooting mechanism When the recording mode is continued, recording is possible from Recording Pause, Stop mode, and power off. This does not apply to cases where the cassette has been removed. If the recording mode is different in HDV recording and DV recording, connected recording is not possible (an Invalid recording section is inserted between the parts). The timecode is also not continuous. When Recording Pause continues for approx. 5 minutes. When the battery voltage falls below a specified value. During playback of HDV-recorded tapes, this function outputs video/audio down-converted to the DV standards from the HDV/DV terminal. When DV LOCKED is set for DV OUTPUT on the PLAY/OUT SETUP menu, the down-converted DV signals of the video/audio during HDV tape playback (including special playback) are output from the HDV/DV terminal. This function is enabled only when the Playback Standards setting is set to AUTO or HDV. The HDV/DV terminal output signals corresponding to the Playback Standards setting and DV OUTPUT setting are shown in the table below. Playback Standards setting AUTO DV HDV DV HDV/DV HDV DV Related specifications DV DV HDV DV HDV DV No output HDV No output DV No output DV No output DV
6-10-2 Power automatic stop function 6-10-3 DV conversion function
DV OUTPUT setting
Playback signal
DV Conversion is enabled for Tape VCR only. No menu display is shown for other modes. During playback with the DV terminal set to DV, no text will be output to the component output video. The image output in the DV mode entirely consists of 60i images. During normal playback and still image playback, the system data undergoing DV conversion and output consists of the date, date and time, camera data. The system data output to the DV terminal during search playback consists of the date, and date and time. During connection to the HDV/DV terminal, the DV Conversion settings cannot be changed. If there is more than one recording date, this function cues up to the position where the date changes. Forward/reverse date search (use the / keys on the remote control after selecting Date Search with remote control Search Select); the search can be set for up to 10 images before or after the current position. When the END SEARCH key is pressed in VCR mode after completion of shooting, the tape moves to the position where the shooting last ended, cues to the end of the shooting, and then stops the tape. Furthermore, when an end search is being performed, the tape is played back starting about 4 seconds before the end of the shooting, enabling the image immediately before the end to be checked. However, this function does not work when the tape has been removed after shooting. Set reference city (city of time clock setting) and select name of city when shooting. Date and time are automatically adjusted to local date and time, and recorded in data code. Built-in, volume adjustment provided When the Canon Compact Power Adapter CA-570 is connected, the battery pack installed in the battery pack compartment can be charged. (During charging, the charge lamp flashes. The lamp remains on when charging is complete.) One flash per second for a charge level of 0% to 50%, two flashes per second for a charge level of 50% to 95% or it lights for a charge level of 95% or more.) NB-2L : Approx.110min., NB-2LH : Approx.130min., BP-2L12 : Approx. 200min., BP-2L13 : Approx.200min, BP-2L14 : Approx.225min. Still images recorded on memory cards can be uploaded to a PC by connecting the supplied IFC300PCU interface cable between a USB terminal on the PC and the USB terminal of the camcorder. Also, still images can be downloaded from the PC to memory cards in the camcorder. Not possible
6-10-4 Search a. Date search
b. End search
6-10-5 World clock display 6-10-6 Speaker 6-10-7 Battery charging function
Charging time 6-10-8 File transfer a. USB file transfer
b. DV file transfer
21

6-10-9 Analog/digital conversion This function converts analog AV signals input to the AV mini-terminal into digital DV signals in real-time and outputs the digital DV signals from the HDV/DV terminal. When an 8mm video player or VHS video player is connected with the camcorder using a AV cable and the camcorder is connected to a PC using a DV cable, 8mm tape or VHS tape playback images can be output to the PC. (ON must be selected for the [AV DV] VCR setting in the VCR menu screen.) If the zoom lever is flipped to the Tele side during image playback from the tape or card (except for movie), the image being played back can be enlarged up to 5 times its size. (The initial setting of the playback zoom switch is 2 playback zoom, and this can be changed to 1 to 5 using the zoom lever.) Playback zoom is cancelled by holding the zoom lever to the Wide side until the frame display no longer appears. Position of the enlarged section during enlarged screen view can be changed by Joystick. (On the LCD monitor, a frame is displayed to show the zoom-in area, and the direction in which the area can be moved by the Joystick is indicated by / ) Supported. This button lights up when the camcorder is connected to a PictBridge-compatible printer or a PC, and when the button is pressed, images are printed out by the printer or sent to the PC. Built-in. When the battery is not used for about three months, the power may be discharged and the date and time settings will be cancelled. The date and time need to be reset after either connecting a power supply or installing batteries and charging. It takes approximately 24 hours for a full charge. Function for displaying the graphs of the brightness information of the still images during card camera (when checking still images)/card playback Provided; function for switching the display information with each operation All information displayed tape operation icons only All information displayed data codes erased only operation icons/time codes, etc. displayed all information displayed All information displayed no information displayed Switching between all information displayed histogram/all information displayed except Exif no information displayed Guide displays are shown regardless of the DISP. button. Function for jumping to subsequent still images in 10- or 100-frame increments and displaying them. A function for jumping (in 6-frame increments) to the previous page or next page is provided on the index screen. None Function for setting the video output in line with the TV type, whether wide-screen TV (16:9) or normal-screen TV (4:3). This function cancels out the TV type setting established with DV input. Operation cannot be performed while a HDMI connection is made. See (18) below for the video output specifications.
6-10-10 Playback zoom
6-10-11 Print/Share (PRINT/SHARE) button
6-10-12 Internal lithium battery
6-10-13 Histogram display 6-10-14 DISP. button For movie camera For movie playback For still image camera For still image playback
6-10-15 Still image jump
6-10-16 HDV logo lamp 6-10-17 TV type setting
22

6-10-17 Terminal output specifications in each mode of HV20 E. The images which correspond to the display capabilities of the display unit are output from the HDMI terminal. The specifications of each output are given after the tables below.
Mode/setting
Component Output
D3 (1440 1080)
AV Output
Squeeze
EVF/LCD display
16:9 Wide
1394 Output
MPEG TS
HD/Still Image 16:9

D3 (1440 1080)
SideBlack & squeeze
SideBlack
MPEG TS
Still Image 4:3 Camera SD 4:3
D1 (SD) Normal
4:3 Normal
SideBlack
DV (SD)
D1 (SD) Squeeze
Squeeze
16:9 Wide
DV (SD) squeeze
SD 16:9
D3 (1440 1080) Squeeze 16:9 Wide Input status
HD
(*1)
D1 (SD) Normal
4:3 Normal
SideBlack Input status
SD 4:3 DV input SD 16:9 Squeeze (*1)

D1 (SD) Squeeze Squeeze 16:9 Wide
Input status
D1 (SD) LetterBox
LetterBox
LetterBox+SideBlack Input status
SD 16:9 Letterbox
*1: The TV type setting is canceled.
23
HV20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT Mode/setting For a widescreen TV HD For a Normal TV

D1 (SD) Normal 4:3 Normal SideBlack DV (SD) Forced D1 LetterBox LetterBox+SideBlack MPEG TS
Component Output
D3 (1440 1080)
AV Output
Squeeze
EVF/LCD display
16:9 Wide
1394 Output
MPEG TS
SD 4:3 Tape Playback

D1 (SD) Squeeze Squeeze 16:9 Wide DV (SD) Squeeze
SD 16:9 Squeeze
For a widescreen TV
D1 LetterBox LetterBox LetterBox+SideBlack DV (SD) Squeeze
For a Normal TV
D1 (SD) LetterBox LetterBox LetterBox+SideBlack D1 (SD) LetterBox
SD 16:9 Letterbox
SideBlack DV (SD)
SD 4:3
Output stop
Input status
16:9 Wide
DV (SD) squeeze
Analog input
SD 16:9 Squeeze
Output stop
Input status
LetterBox+SideBlack
DV (SD) LetterBox
SD 16:9 Letterbox
Output stop
Input status
D3 (1440 1080)
Squeeze
16:9 Wide
MPEG TS
1920 1080 Single

D3 (1440 1080) Squeeze SideBlack MPEG TS
Card Playback
4:3 (1440 1080) Single
D3 (1440 1080)
Squeeze
16:9 Wide
MPEG TS
Index Playback
: SD squeeze is set if 576i has been set on the menu. : While the HDMI terminal is connected, the images are displayed in the wide mode. Note : The component/AV output signals are shut down while the HDMI terminal is connected.
24

6-10-18 Images output from the HDMI terminal This table lists the priority sequence for the HV20 E output images corresponding to the display capabilities of the display unit connected to the HV20 E. It is possible to check which images are currently being output using Playback output settings (camera/ playback) on the menu. Camera body mode HD SD (wide) SD (normal) Print screen (HD) 1 ------Output 1080i 480i/576i (16:9) 2 (*2) 1 3 1 (*2) 480i/576i (4:3) 4 (*2) 3 1 3 (*2) 480P/576P (16:9) 3 (*3) 2 (*4) 4 (*4) 2 (*3) 480P/576P (4:3) 5(*3) 4 (*4) 2 (*4) 4 (*3)
(*2) : Down-conversion, (*3) : IP conversion after down-conversion, (*4) : IP conversion processing The sound is delivered in one of the linear PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) output formats listed in the table below depending on the mode of the HV20 E main unit Camera body mode SD-12bit/32kHz-2ch/4ch SD-16bit/48kHz-2ch HD-48Hz-2ch/4ch Output 32kHz-16bit-2ch 48kHz-16bit-2ch 48kHz-16bit-2ch
Related specifications 1. When a receiver is connected to the HV20 E main unit using the HDMI terminal, the video output to the component/composite terminals is forcibly shut down. 2. The audio signals to the AV mini terminal are output all the time if that terminal has been connected. 3. If a DVI monitor (for a PC) has been connected, RGB signals in the 576P format will be output, but no guarantees are made for the connections or quality of the images displayed on the monitor. 4. During an HMDI connection, the TV type and Component output menu settings are grayed out and rendered inoperable. 5. When HDV/DV signals are input or the analog input mode is established, the HDMI output is forcibly shut down. 6. In both the SD and HD modes, the sound can be selected by setting Audio output as with the LINE OUT output when a 4channel tape is played back. 7. DVI signals will be output if the EDID of the unit connected to the HV20 E cannot be read, if the EDID which has been read has been destroyed or if the output format cannot be determined for some other reason. 8. When a copy-protected tape has been played back, the output signals of the HDMI terminal will be muted, and a warning will be displayed. Neither will signals be output to the HDMI terminal when a copy-disabled tape on which digital broadcasts have been recorded with analog input signals is played back. (At such times, the EVF/LCD will also be muted.) 9. Bilingual audio signals cannot be output to the HDMI terminal. The status settings can be checked using Playback/output settings on the menu screen. The output displays are given below with the PAL displays in parentheses. (1) When 1920 1080i signals are output, 1920 1080i is displayed. (2) When 720 576i signals are output, 720 576i is displayed. (3) When 720 576P signals are output, 720 576P is displayed. (4) When DVI signals are output, DVI is displayed. (5) When no units have been connected or the output format has not been determined, --------- is displayed. 6-11 Terminal 6-11-1 HDV/DV terminal Special 4-pin (IEEE 1394 compatible); input and output 6-11-2 HDMI terminal Type A (19 pins), output only 6-11-3 AV mini-terminal 3.5mm diameter, 4-pin mini jack, input/output 6-11-4 External microphone input terminal 3.5mm stereo mini-jack 6-11-5 Headphone terminal 3.5mm stereo mini-jack (also serves as AV mini-terminal) 6-11-6 Component terminals Special mini-D terminal : Only outputs which support the 1080i or 576i standard 6-11-7 USB port Mini-B Receptacle, USB 2.0 Full-Speed compliant 6-11-8 Memory card connection terminal Special multi-pin 6-11-9 Battery terminal Special 3-pin 6-11-10 DC input terminal 3.4mm jack
25

7 Power 7-1 Input power supply 7-2 Power consumption HDV
7.4V DC (battery pack), 8.4V DC (DC IN) During recording approx. 4.3W (using CVF), approx. 4.5W/approx.4.7W (LCD monitor : Normal/Bright) (During recording and AF focusing) During playback approx. 3.6W (LCD monitor : Normal) During recording approx. 3.8W (using CVF); approx. 4.0W/approx.4.2W (LCDmonitor : Normal/Bright) (During recording and AF focusing) During playback approx. 3.2W (LCD monitor : Normal) Approx. 88 80 138mm (Approx. 3.5 3.2 5.4 in) (Not including grip belt) Approx. 535g (1.2 lb) Approx. 615g (1.4 lb) (BP-2L13, tape and memory card included)
DV
8 Dimensions (W H D) 9 Weight 9-1 Main unit 9-2 Total equipped weight
10 Temperature and humidity requirements 10-1 Temperature and humidity requirements for performance 0C to 40C, 85% (relative humidity) 10-2 Temperature and humidity requirements for operation -5C to 45C, 60% (relative humidity)
26
3. System Diagram
WS-20 Wrist Strap
SS-600/SS-650 Shoulder Strap MiniDV Video cassette
CB-2LWE Battery Charger
BP-2L13, BP-2L14, NB-2LH Battery Pack
BP-2L13, BP-2L14, NB-2LH Battery Pack WL-D87 Wireless Controller CA-570 Compact Power Adapter WD-H43 Wide-converter
TL-H43 Tele-converter
STV-250N Stereo Video Cable
SCART Adapter
VCR
FS-43U/FS-43U II Filter Set
DTC-100 D Terminal Cable TV/HDTV CTC-100 Component Cable
SC-2000 Soft Carrying Case
HDMI Cable CV-150F/CV-250F DV Cable DVD Recorder/Digital Device with DV Terminal
VFL-1 Video Flash Light
miniSD Card Adapter
VL-3 Video Light
miniSD Card
Card Reader/Writer
Computer
DM-50 Directional Stereo Microphone Stereo Microphone (commercially available)
IFC-300PCU USB Cable PictBridge Compatible Printers
Fig. 2
27
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTON
CONTENTS
1. Technical Description ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 1-1 HDMI Terminal --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 1-2 New Video Recording Standards ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 1-2-1 HDV (PF25) and CINE Mode (Each of these modes is effective only while the camera is in the tape mode.) - 2 1-3 Improved Operability -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 2. PCB Functions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3 3. Power Supply Circuit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5 3-1 Startup of Power Supply ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5 3-2 Power Fuses ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7 3-3 Power Supply Circuits ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8 4. Built-in Charger Circuit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9 4-1 Outline ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 4-2 Operation at Charging ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 4-2-1 Conditions to Start Charging ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 4-2-2 Progress of Charging ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11 5. Signal Processing Circuit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12 5-1 Outline of Signal Processing Circuit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 12 5-2 Camera Signal Processing ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 13 5-3 Recorder Signal Processing ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14 5-4 Audio Signal Flow --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16 6. System Control, Servo ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17 6-1 Outline of System Control, Servo ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17 6-2 Major Functions of Each MI-COM -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 18 6-3 Servo Control --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19 6-4 Personal Computer Connection Mode (USB) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20 6-5 Error Detection ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21 6-5-1 Error Detecting Conditions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 21 6-5-2 Processing after Error Detection ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 21
HV20 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
1. Technical Description
1-1 HDMI Terminal
The HV20 E comes with an HMDI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) digital interface terminal for inputting and outputting the next-generation video, audio and control signals. This is the interface which was developed for digital home appliances and audiovisual equipment. Using a completely digital system, the HDMI terminal enables the transfer of the video, audio and inter-unit control signals by means of an easily routable cable provided with small (19-pin) terminals. When the HDMI terminal on the HV20 E is connected to another display unit, the information on the display units capabilities referred as the EDID (Extended Display Identification Data) is read by the HV20 E, and the units output format is determined. What happens next is that the video images and sound best suited to the display unit are transmitted from the HV20 E main unit. This means that there is now no longer the need to set the TV display mode (normal or wide) to match the display unit to which the HV20 E is connected something that would be necessary with other terminals. The HV20 E does not support HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) for protecting contents from being copied, the CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) function for exercising reciprocal control between units or color space expansion. In this way, the standard of the video images output from the HV20 E is determined by the capabilities of the display unit connected to the HV20 E, and the table below shows the sequence of priority for the output of the HV20 E in terms of each of the display units capabilities.
Camera body mode HD SD (wide) SD (normal) Print screen (HD) 1 ------Output 1080i 480i/576i (16:9) 2 (*1) 1 3 1 (*1) 480i/576i (4:3) 4 (*1) 3 1 3 (*1) 480P/576P (16:9) 3 (*2) 2 (*3) 4 (*3) 2 (*2) 480P/576P (4:3) 5 (*2) 4 (*3) 2 (*3) 4 (*2)
(*1) : Down-conversion, (*2) : IP conversion after down-conversion, (*3) : IP conversion processing The sound is delivered in one of the linear PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) output formats listed in the table below depending on the mode of the HV20 E main unit.
Camera body mode SD-12bit/32kHz-2ch/4ch SD-16bit/48kHz-2ch HD-48Hz-2ch/4ch Output 32kHz-16bit-2ch 48kHz-16bit-2ch 48kHz-16bit-2ch
Related specifications 1. When a receiver is connected to the HV20 E main unit using the HDMI terminal, the video output to the component/composite terminals is forcibly shut down. 2. The audio signals to the AV terminal are output all the time if that terminal has been connected. 3. If a DVI monitor (for a PC) has been connected, RGB signals in the 576P format will be output, but no guarantees are made for the connections or quality of the images displayed on the monitor. 4. During an HDMI connection, the TV type and Component output menu settings are grayed out and rendered inoperable. 5. When HDV/DV signals are input or the analog input mode is established, the HDMI output is forcibly shut down. 6. In both the SD and HD modes, the sound can be selected by setting Audio output as with the LINE OUT output when a 4channel tape is played back. 7. DVI signals will be output if the EDID of the unit connected to the HV20 E cannot be read, if the EDID which has been read has been destroyed or if the output format cannot be determined for some other reason. 8. hen a copy-protected tape has been played back, the output signals of the HDMI terminal will be muted, and a warning will be displayed. Neither will signals be output to the HDMI terminal when a copy-disabled tape on which digital broadcasts have been recorded with analog input signals is played back. (At such times, the EVF/LCD will also be muted.) 9. Bilingual audio signals cannot be output to the HDMI terminal.
HV20 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION The status settings can be checked on the menu screen. (1)When 1920 1080i signals are output, 1920 1080i is displayed. (2)When 720 576i signals are output, 720 576i is displayed. (3)When 720 576P signals are output, 720 576P is displayed. (4)When DVI signals are output, DVI is displayed. (5)When no units have been connected or the output format has not been determined, --------- is displayed. Fig. 1
1-2 New Video Recording Standards

1-2-1 HDV (PF25) and CINE Mode (Each of these modes is effective only while the camera is in the tape mode.)
The HV20 E features some new functions that enable users to take shots with a cine-like quality or that can be applied as full-blown digital cinema tools. (1) PAL : HDV (PF25) The PF (Progressive Frame)25 setting, which has the same frame rate as cine shooting, has been added as a video recording standard. (Refer to the figure on the right.) This enables movie shooting at 25 frames per second which is a rate that takes full advantage of the progressive readout capability of the CMOS chip. When this mode is established, real 25P shooting with HD image quality is executed. In PAL areas, tapes are recorded in the 50i format using 2:3 pulldown. (2) CINE mode Joining the mode in (1) is the CINE mode which has been added to enable shooting at a film image quality. (FUNC. setting: Refer to the figure on the right.) When CINE mode is established, the cine gamma, cine matrix and other image quality adjustments which are based on custom preset 8 (CP8: CINE.V) of the XH G1 E, XH A1 E are performed. By setting both the cinema mode and the HDV (PF25) mode in (1), users can achieve images with a cine-like quality during TV viewing. Whats more, the HDV (PF25) mode and CINE mode can each be set independently: for instance, users can even set up the image quality of the CINE mode when the HDV/ DV (wide)/DV (normal) setting has been selected. However, this setting is not available in the AUTO mode.
CINE MODE
HDV(PF25)
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
1-3 Improved Operability

On the side panel at the front of the HV20 E main unit are a dedicated focus button for switching between Auto focus and manual focus and a focus dial for focusing which team up to improve focusing operations. The same side panel at the front of the HV20 E main unit has a backlight correction button (BLC button) for allocating the backlight correction function to make it easier for users to operate the function using their left hand while they are holding the camera in their right hand.
Backlight correction button Focus button (A/M switching) Focusing dial
Fig. 4
2. PCB Functions
(1) MAIN PCB System-Control Section IC100 IC101 IC102 IC103 IC104 IC105 IC106 IC107 IC108 CCM MI-COM FLASH EX-OR GATE AND GATE MOTOR DRIVER IC NAND GATE EX-OR GATE NOR GATE CHIP SELECT DECODER System control (Camera/Card/Mode) Flash-ROM for CCM MI-COM (16Mbit) Generation of address signals and CS signals Pass-ready notification signal between IC100/IC1101 (DIGIC DV II) and between IC1000 (MPX) Motor drive for barrier Generation of address signals and CS signals Generation of address signals and CS signals Generation of address signals and CS signals Generation of address signals and CS signals MIC communication control AGC, image composition, defective pixel compensation, serial/parallel conversion Camera digital signal processing, card video image processing Memory for DIGIC DV II (128Mbit) Memory for DIGIC DV II (128Mbit) Zoom, focus motor driver, IRIS driver, and gyro output AMP CVF signal processing/driving Driver IC for shift lens drive 8-bit, 8ch D/A converter for adjusting shift lens, DMC and focus lens Shift lens positional sensor, sensor amplifier Record playback head amplifier Digital VCR signal processing LSI, FR MI-COM, Analog SD signal input/output processing IEEE 1394 digital signal processing (MPEG-2 TS / DV) Serial communication control Memory for video signal processing/recording signal processing Timing adjustment at WRITE access to SRAM Timing adjustment at WRITE access to SRAM Memory for IC2303 Compression/expansion for video & audio HDV Component/SDI output, HD SD conversion 75 driver AMP for component output HDMI signal processing For reversing signal logic Signal control Drum, capstan, and loading motor driver Power DC/DC converter (MAIN) 3.2V regulator 4.6V regulator Power DC/DC converter (SUB) 5.0V regulator
IC109 ANALOG SWITCH Camera/Card section IC1000 IC1100 IC1102 IC1103 IC1200 IC1501 Lens section IC1611 IC1612 IC1613 Video section IC2000 IC2301 IC2303 IC2306 IC2307 IC2308 IC2309 IC2310 IC2800 IC2801 IC2802 IC2830 IC2831 IC2833 Servo section IC300 PM section IC3200 IC3260 IC3261 IC3300 IC3310 MPX4 DIGIC DV II SDRAM SDRAM LENS DRIVER CVF DRIVER SHIFT LENS DRIVER IC D/A CONVERTER OPE AMP VRP2 VIC HDV 1394IC OR GATE SDRAM AND GATE AND GATE FLASH/SRAM HDV CODEC IC BASEBAND IC COMPONENT DRIVER HDMI IC DUAL INVERTER IC PRESET AND CLEAR MOTOR DRIVER IC MAIN POWER IC 3.2V REGULATOR 4.6V REGULATOR SUB POWER IC 5.0V REGULATOR
HV20 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION USB section IC3500 Audio section IC801 USB conector (2) LCD PCB IC901 IC902 IC903 (3) CVF PCB IC1691 IC1692 (4) JACK PCB IC501 IC502 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL CMOS IC FLASH main condenser electric charge control Flash light emission switch drive P SENSOR GYRO Y SENSOR GYRO Pitch-direction angular velocity detection Yaw-direction angular velocity detection
USB IC AIF4
USB I/F Analog input/output signal processing, speaker amplifier
LCD DRIVER EEPROM 2.8V REGULATOR
LCD signal processing/driving EEPROM for LCD parts data 2.8V regulator
(5) CMOS SENSOR PCB IC1040 IC1041 IC1042 IC1043 IC1044 IC1045 IC1046 IC1047 (6) LCD PCB LCD open detection SW, LCD reversing detection SW (7) REAR PCB Eject SW (8) CVF FPC PCB Display button switch, Easy direct button switch (9) CARD PCB Reset SW (10) MF DIAL FPC PCB Backlight correction button switch, Focus button switch, Focus dial switch (11) C COVER ZOOM FPC PCB Zoom lever switch, Joystick switch, Photo button switch, SET button switch, Power supply switch button, Movie shooting mode selector switch, Start/stop button switch, Tape/Card selector switch, FUNC button switch INVERTER AFE AFE 5V REGULATOR 4.2V REGULATOR AMP CMOS 2.7V REGULATOR Standard logic inverter Bch, Rch Gch 5V regulator 4.2V regulator Operational amplifier CMOS image sensor 2.7V regulator
3. Power Supply Circuit

3-1 Startup of Power Supply
DMC-III CASSETTE IN SW
IC2301 FR MI-COM. (VIC HDV)
IC1100 DIGIC DV II
MAIN PCB
12
SERIAL DATA
CN3200 + DC JACK
IC3300 SUB POWER IC

VCC CTL 3
E14 CAS IN
A13 VTR ON IC3300 U10 DC V DET G1 RESET C14 VTR ON IC3200 C7 VTR ON C1 CCM RESET E3+LI A4
VCC
2.8V REG.
VCC
BATTERY WIRE
BATTERY TERMINAL + E3V B5
IC3200 MAIN POWER IC

CN3201 A16-A23 B13-B20 F9 E3V Q100 A2 LI-POWER A5
IC100 CCM MI-COM.
CN1 A16-A23 B13-B20
G14 B RESET
CAM POW SW E16 EJECT VTR SW POW SW D17 D16
RESET SW CN500 B28 CN1 B28 LITHIUM BATTERY (2ND) EJECT SW CN102 2 CN1501 5 6 CN872 5 6
CVF FPC
EJECT PCB
CN873 6 5 CN100 6 5 POWER SW
BATTERY WIRE
CASSETTE COVER
Fig. 5
HV20 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Backup Lithium Battery LI3V power from lithium battery is input to the IC3200-A2 pin, output from A4 pin and supplied to the MI-COM as its power. Thus, the MI-COM performs various data backup and clock operations when the main power supply is not connected. Main Power Supply Power fed from main power (DC JACK/BATTERY) is input to IC3200, converted into 2.8V through its internal regulator and output as E3V from B5 pin. Due to internal switchover, instead of LI3V from lithium battery, 2.8V power output is supplied from the A4 pin through the internal regulator. When power is fed from main power, the IC3200 outputs H signal from its C1 pin. When detecting this H signal, the MI-COM recognizes that the main power supply has been connected, and performs initialization and is brought into the standby status. Under this status, the MI-COM performs detection of startup-related switches. When detecting that any of the startup-related switches has been turned on, the VCR ON (H) signal is output from C14 pin. Upon output of VCR ON (H) signal, the power for each circuit is turned on. Power output from A5 pin of IC3200 is also used for recharging the lithium secondary battery.
3-2 Power Fuses
BATTERY WIRE
CN1 BATT. TERMINAL BATT +
MAIN PCB
CN3201 BATT. + FU1900 SHOE FU3203 DRUM, CAPSTAN FU500 ST UNREG FU3202 FU3200 FU3201 CN3200 DC + FU1800 CHARGE UNREG 5.35V 1.5V, 3.0V, 5.0V, 8.5V, VTR UNREG, DC/DC IC(MAIN, SUB) 1.2V, 1.8V, 2.7V, LCD BL, 1.2V
Fig. 6 The power supply from the battery DC JACK is supplied to five fuses on the MAIN PCB, through which the following seven power voltages are delivered. (1) SHOE : FU1900 Advanced accessory shoe power source (2) DRUM + CAPSTAN : FU3203 DRUM/CAPSTAN (3) ST UNREG : FU500 Main capacitor charging power source for flash memory (4) 1.5V + 3.0V + 5.0V + 8.5V + VTR UNREG + DC/DC : FU3202 1.5V power source (DVDD1.4V, AVDD1.4V) 3.0V power source (AVDD3.0V, LCD3.0V, HA3.0V, USB3.2V, STROBE3.0V) 5.0V power source (P5V, LDC5V, AVDD4.6V, AA4.6V, HA4.6V, AVDD3.2V, HDMI3.2V) 8.5V power source (LDC8.5V) VTR UNREG DC/DC CONVERTER power source (5) 1.2V + 1.8V + 2.7V + LCD : FU3203 1.2V power source (MACS1.2V, AVDD1.2V, TRIPLET1.2V REG, VICX1.2V) 1.8V power source (DDR1.8V, AFE1.8V, MACS SDRAM1.8V, SDRAM1.8V, HDMI1.8V) 2.7V power source (DVDD2.7V, AVDD2.7V, AA2.7V, EVF2.7V) LCD backlight drive power source (BL POW) (6) CHARGE UNREG : FU1800 Battery Charge circuit power source (7) 5.35V : FU3201 HDMI Power source CAM5V Power source 5.35V Power source (P5.15V)
3-3 Power Supply Circuits

Figure 7 shows the power supply circuits. The ON/OFF condition of each power supply voltage is controlled by the VTR ON signals output from the CCM MI-COM.
MAIN PCB
LPF C5 PWM A7 B7 J1 PWM G1 G2 K1 PWM N2 M2 C6 PWM A10 B10 LPF LPF LPF
MACS 1.2V VICX 1.2V AVDD 1.2V TRIPLETS 1.2V
DVDD 1.4V AVDD 1.4V DVDD 2.7V AVDD 2.7V EVF 2.7V AA 2.7V
IC3200 SUB POWER IC
DVDD 1.8V SDRAM 1.8V HDMI 1.8V
LCD BL ON From BACK END
H11 CTL 9 J2
VTR ON From CCM MI-COM.
C2 SW CTL M10 CTL 10 C7 CTL
PWM
N8 M8
AFE 1.8V SDRAM 1.8V HDMI 1.8V
K2 PWM CCD CAM ON From CCM MI-COM. G11 CTL7 C13 N10 D12 B12 UNREG B4 AVDD2 C12 REG. B5 E 3V SENS 1.35V LCD 8.5V LCD BL POW LCD BL VFB N5 M5 LPF P5V LCD 5V
Fig. 7
4. Built-in Charger Circuit
BATTERY
+ B+ D THERMISTOR
BATT. TERMINAL BATT + BATT INFO B+ BATT INFO D BATT TEMP BATT
CN1 BATT+ BATT INFO B+ BATT INFO D BATT TEMP A28-A30, B29-B31
A31
B32
A32
BATTERY WIRE
CN3200 DC JACK + DETECT
UNREG.
PM SECTION
CN3201 BATT TEMP BATT INFO D BATT INFO B+ Q1803 (Part) Q1802 B7 BATT INFO D C7 BATT TEMP U10 DC V DET G13 DC J DET F9 E3V L11 VCC N11 OUTPUT DRIVE M12 L12 A8 A/D V D7 A/D I E12 CHG CTL1 E3V B5 J11 E11 CHG CTL BATT+
A32
B32
A31 A28-A30 B29-B31
FU1800
IC100 CCM MI-COM
IC3200 MAIN POWER CONTROL
OSC K3
CONTROL K11 M11 Q1801
MAIN PCB
Fig. 8
4-1 Outline
The main circuit elements and their functions are as follows. (1) IC100 (CCM MI-COM) Control of IC3200 Error discrimination and display Detection and display of charging progress Detection of DC JACK connection and voltage Detection of internal battery temperature (2) IC3200 (MAIN POWER IC) Charging voltage/current control
4-2 Operation at Charging

4-2-1 Conditions to Start Charging
When the following conditions are satisfied, the CCM MI-COM (IC100) controls the IC3201 and starts charging. Conditions 1 2 3 4 5 6 Main unit power is turned OFF DC jack is connected. Power supplied from DC jack UNREG voltage is within the range of 8.03V to 8.80 V. Battery temperature is within the range of -6.7C to 49.4C. Confirmation of the type of the battery connected Detection CCM MI-COM CCM MI-COM pin G13 DC J DET CCM MI-COM pin U10 DC V DET CCM MI-COM pin A7 BATT.A/D CCM MI-COM pin C7 BATT.TEMP CCM MI-COM pin B7 BATT.INFO D Source of detection DC JACK DC IN UNREG. Battery T terminal Battery D terminal
Unless condition (4) is met, a charge error message appears, and no charging occurs. Unless condition (5) is met, no charge error message appears; charging does not start unless condition (5) is met. If the type in (6) could not be confirmed, a charge error is indicated.
10
4-2-2 Progress of Charging

The IC3200 starts a trickle charge under control of the CCM MI-COM (IC100). Trickle charge (1) continues until battery voltage reaches 5.2V; trickle charge (2) continues until battery voltage reaches 6.5V; as soon as battery voltage reaches 6.5V, the IC 3201 starts a 666mA quick charge. Then, the charge current decreases gradually with the progress of charging (because of an increase in impedance of the battery). When the charge current becomes 68mA or less, the end-of-charging indication is provided. Thereafter, supplementary charging is performed for 72 minutes at maximum until the charge current becomes 33mA or less.
Charging current
LED flashes once Quick charge 666mA When battery voltage reaches 6.5V, quick charge starts.
LED flashes twice
LED lights up steadily
480mA
An error is indicated if the battery voltage becomes 5.7V or lower during quick charging or constant-voltage charging. An error is indicated if the battery temperature is not within the range of 10.1 C to 55.6 C. Trickle 64mA 68mA When the battery voltage reaches 5.2 V, the trickle timer (2) is started. 33mA Trickle1 Trickle2 Quick charge timer Timeout timer timer error 3min. max Timeout error 76min. max Timeout error Total timer 348min.max Full charge indication at timeout 162min.max 2-flash Full charge timer indication at timeout 204min.max Supplementary charge timer Elapsed time
72min.max
Fig. 9
11
5. Signal Processing Circuit

5-1 Outline of Signal Processing Circuit
Shown in Fig.10 are the entire block and the visual/audio signal flow of the signal processing circuit under HD/SD mode.
MAIN PCB
RIGHT PCB
IC1102 SDRAM IC1103 SDRAM
CMOS SENSOR PCB LENS

IC1046 CMOS
Gr Gb SERIAL R B SERIAL
mini SD
LCD PCB
IC901 LCD DRIVER LCD
IC1041 AFE
SERIAL
R B
IC1042 AFE
Gr SERIAL Gb
IC1000 MPX4
IC1100 DIGIC DV II
IC2801 BASEBAND IC
PR PB Y
PR
IC2802 75 DRIVER
PB Y
COMPONENT OUT TERMINAL
IC2830 HDMI IC
CVF FPC
MIC
L R
IC801 AIF4
IC2800 HDV CODEC
IC2303 1394 IC
HDV/DV TERMINAL
AUDIO L AUDIO R VIDEO I/O
IC2301 VIC HDV
IC2307 SDRAM IC2000 VRP2 REC/PB HEAD
SPEAKER
CVF
AV JACK
IC1501 CVF DRIVER
HDMI FPC
Analog Signal Digital Signal HDMI TERMINAL HD mode only SD mode only
Fig. 10
12
5-2 Camera Signal Processing
CMOS SENSOR PCB
MAIN PCB
IC1102 SDRAM IC1103 SDRAM mini SD MEMORY CARD
IC1046 CMOS R G R G G B G B R G R G TG
R B
384MHz SERIAL R
IC1041 AFE
IC1000 MPX4
460MHz SERIAL EVEN LINE
IC1100 DIGIC DV II
Gr Gb
IC1042 AFE M-TG OSC

48MHz
Gr Gb
Sensor correction exchange
CCD LINE
Still image processing Movie processing
TO BASEBAND IC
Fig. 11 <Outline> The CMOS sensor outputs R, B, Gr and Gb signals, respectively, at 4 channels. Then after processing in AFE, the CMOS SENSOR circuit board outputs serial signals at 384MHz still at 4 channels. On the Main circuit board, MPX4 performs CMOS sensor compensation such as compensation of unevenness in the 4ch outputs, and delivers RGB signals to DIGIC DV II as serial signals which are divided into 2 channels (even line and odd line) at 480MHz. The DIGIC DV II makes a general processing of moving image and still image signals while using two SDRAM. Moving image signals outputs video data to BASEBANDIC as non-compression HD signal at 1440 1080 in the HD mode and DV format signals at 720 576(PAL) in the 8D mode. In the moving image mode, signals at 1920 1080 pixels (2M) are input to the DIGIC DV II and still images at 1920 1080 pixels (2M) can be recorded in the memory card. In the still image mode, signals at 1920 1440 (2.8M) are processed.
13
5-3 Recorder Signal Processing

Figure 12 shows the signal processing circuit at HD mode.
IC2830 HDMI IC D.TERMINAL (Analog) LCD/CVF IC2307 SDRAM
HDMI TERMINAL
IC1100 DIGIC DV II
IC2801 BASE BAND IC
S/Video TERMINAL IC2301 VIC HDV VIDEO HEAD FR MI-COM IC2000 VRP2
IC801 AIF4
Audio
IC2800 HDV CODEC IC
: HD Signal DV TERMINAL MPEG-2 TS IC2303 1394 IC : MPEG Signal : SD Signal Fig. 12
Figure 13 shows the signal processing circuit at SD mode.
IC2830 HDMI IC D.TERMINAL (Analog) LCD/CVF IC2307 SDRAM
HDMI TERMINAL
IC1100 DIGIC DV II
IC2801 BASE BAND IC
S/Video TERMINAL IC2301 VIC HDV VIDEO HEAD FR MI-COM IC2000 VRP2
IC801 AIF4
IC2800 HDV CODEC IC
DV TERMINAL
DV
IC2303 1394 IC
DV
: SD Signal
Fig. 13
14
HV20 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION < VIC HDV4 >IC2301 - With built-in FR MI-COM, HDV recording is enabled in addition to the conventional SD recording in the VIC4. By performing HDV/DVD signal processing respectively in independent circuits, high-quality image is realized both in HDV and SD modes. In HD mode: HD video signal and audio data are input from the HDV CODEC IC as MPEG-2 PES data. In the VIC HDV, sub-code data and ITI data are added and output to the VRP2 as 41.85Mbps data in HDV standard. In SD mode: The video data and signal input into the VIC HDV are processed in digital VTR standard. In the VIC HDV, audio data, sub-code data and ITI data are also created, and these signals are output to the VPR2 as 41.85Mbps data in DV standard. < 1394 IC >IC2303 In HD mode: The MPEG-2 PES signal is input from the HDV CODEC ITC. In this IC, it is converted into MPEG-2 TS signal and output from the HDV/DV terminal. In SD mode: The DV signal input from the VIC HDV is output as it is from the HDV/DV terminal. When the signal is input to the HDV/SD terminal, the description shown above is reversed, both for HD and SD modes. < VRP2 >IC2000 In the VRP2, the recorded data of 41.85Mbps output from the VIC HDV is amplified and recorded onto the magnetic tape while switching between the CH-1 and CH-2 heads by switching pulses. During playback, the head output signal is amplified and fed to the VIC HDV. < HDV CODEC IC >IC2800 With the built-in CODEC memory, CODEC of video/audio signal is performed in HD mode. As the video data, HD non-compressed signal is input from the BASEBAND IC. This HD signal is converted into compressed data in MPEG-2 standard. As the audio data, non-compressed signal is input from the AIF4 and compressed into MPEG-1 Audio Layer2 (2ch) / MPEG-2 Audio Layer2 (4ch) standard. Video data and audio data are mixed and output in MPEG-2 PES standard. When HDV playback as well as MPEG-2 TS input, the MPEG-2 PES signal is received from the VIC HDV/1394 ITC, decoded into HD signal and output to the BASEBAND IC. < BASEBAND IC >IC2801 In HD mode, analog signal (D terminal output) and digital non-compressed HD signal (HD-SDI output) are output from the noncompressed HD signal input from the DIGIC DV II, and the non-compressed HD signal is supplied to the HDV CODEC IC similarly. Also, the video signal down-converted into SD standard is output to the VID HDV for analog video output as well as LCD display. In SD mode, SD signal is input from the DIGIC DV II. The SD signal is output to the D terminal output/SDI output and VIC HDV. For HDMI output in HD mode, video signal is up-converted or down-converted depending on the EDID of the display device. < HDMI IC >IC2830 Video data input from BASEBAND IC and audio data input from VIC HDV are mixed and output from the HDMI terminal. IP conversion is performed according to the EDICD of the display device.
15
5-4 Audio Signal Flow
MIC
IC2800 HDV CODEC IC IC801 AIF4

SERIAL SPEAKER DRIVER
AV JACK
L R
IC2301 VIC HDV
IC2000 VRP2 REC/PB HEAD
BEEP
FR MI-COM.
HD mode SD mode
HDMI TERMINAL
IC2830 HDMI IC
IC2307 SDRAM
SPEAKER
Fig. 14 < AIF4 >IC801 Incorporates input selector SW, microphone amplifier, HPF, ALC, A/D, D/A and digital I/F ALC. Performs switchover between built-in microphone input and line input (by means of the serial data from the mode MICOM, ALC (Auto Level Control), fading and amplification of respective output signals. The beeping sound at eject is generated in the circuit from the signals from the FR MICOM and switched over in the AIF. Normal sound and beeping sound are switched over in the AIF. < VIC HDV >IC2301 For the purpose of reducing the mechanical noise of the DMC, the following processings are performed. Noise cancellation processing is performed by means of the correlation of the noise components at V frequency. To eliminate image delay with respect to sound due to processing time of video signals of the camera, sound data is stored in the SRAM and the timing of the video is matched with that of the sound. < HDV CODEC IC >IC2800 In the HD mode, receives sound data from the AIF4 and compresses it according to the HDV standard and delivers it to the VIC HDV. When playing back, receives compressed sound data from the VIC HDV, extracts them and outputs them to the AIF4. < AUTO WIND CUT > In the HV10 A, in order to effectively reduce the wind sound, the cut-off frequency of the wind-cut HPF is changed depending on the level of wind sound. < HDMI IC >IC2830 Receives audio data received from the VIC HDV, mix it with video data received from the BASEBAND IC and outputs them from the HDMI terminal in linear PCM.
16
6. System Control, Servo

6-1 Outline of System Control, Servo
Figure 15 shows the overall configuration of the system control & servo circuit, plus the flow of data. System control is performed by the FR MI-COM (IC2301) and CCM MI-COM (IC100) on MAIN PCB.
MAIN PCB
DRUM DRIVER
DRUM M FG/PG
DRUM ON
CAP ON DFG/PG CFG VIC REEL FG

CAPSTAN DRIVER
CAPSTAN M FG REEL FG
IC2301 VIC HDV
IC300 MOTOR DRIVER IC

LOADING DRIVER
DMC III
LOADING M
FR MI-COM
IC2000 VRP2 HEAD IC101 FLASH

MODE SW C.DOWN SW BOT/EOT SENS. DEW
LCD KEY
REW SW
IC801 AIF4
FF SW
MIC
PLAY SW
STOP SW AF SENSOR IC1501 CVF DRIVER
CVF PANEL
CVF FPC
DISP. SW
IC100 CCM MI-COM
CASSETTE COVER
LCD PANEL PHOTO SW TAPE/CARD SW
PRINT SW
IC901 LCD DRIVER
FOCUS DIAL
FOCUS SW FOCUS DIAL SW BLC SW
ZOOM SW
CMOS SENSOR
IC1046 CMOS IC1100 DIGIC DV II
LCD PCB LCD FPC
SET SW
POWER SW
MODE SW IC1041 IC1042 AFE IC1000 MPX4 IC1200 LENS DRIVER
CARD PCB
FUNC. SW
START/STOP SW MEMORY CARD EJECT SW
IRIS DRIVE
LENS
MOTOR DRIVE
Fig. 15
17
6-2 Major Functions of Each MI-COM

(1) FR MI-COM (IC2301 : VIC HDV) The FR microcomputer is provided to control the mechanisms and to detect signals for sensors/switches (DMC III). Listed below are the main functions of the FR microcomputer: VIC (Video) control / AIF4 (Audio Interface) controls BASEBAND IC/HDV CODEC IC/1394 IC/USB IC/HDMI IC control AUDIO control DMC III mechanism control OSD (On Screen Display) bitmap control LCD control * The FR MI-COM in this machine does not have a dedicated EEPROM. Since a flash ROM is used for the FR MI-COM as a substitute for the EEPROM, it is required to update the flash ROM after adjustment and data modification regarding the FR MI-COM. (2) CCM MI-COM (IC100) The major functions of the CCM MI-COM are listed below. Camera section control Various key inputs Remote control input Power ON/OFF control Built-in clock MIC (Memory In Cassette) control AF sensor control Card control Lens control (communication with the lens microcomputer) * In adjustment or data alteration regarding the CCM MI-COM, it is not required to update the flash ROM.
18
6-3 Servo Control

Servo control is carried out by the VIC HDV (VIC and FR MI-COM). The FR MI-COM is used for servo control of motor ON/ OFF and rotational direction, and the VIC is used to output rotational speed and phase control signals. More specifically in terms of signal flow, the VIC detects the FG/PG and PB-RF signals from the motor, and sends the detected signal information to the FR MI-COM. Then, the FR MI-COM generates an error signal to be output to the VIC. Thereafter, the VIC outputs an error signal (PWM), which is driven on the MAIN PCB for sending a control voltage to the motor driver IC.
DC JACK (BATTERY)
DRUM CAP POW
LOAD ON/ UNLOAD FR DERR IC2301 VIC HDV CERR IC300 MOTOR DRIVER IC
DMC III
LOAD+/LOADU/V/W Ucoil/Vcoil/Wcoil LOADING MOTOR DRUM MOTOR CAPSTAN MOTOR CFG2
DA CFG
DA S REEL DA T REEL
S REEL Hall SENSOR T REEL Hall SENSOR
Fig. 16
19
6-4 Personal Computer Connection Mode (USB)
IC1046 CMOS
IC1102 IC1103 SDRAM
Signal flow of Normal Signal flow of USB connection
IC1041 IC1042 AFE
IC1000 MPX4
Movie/Still Image Signal Processing
IC1100 DIGIC DV II
MEMORY CARD
CCM MI-COM
IC3500 USB IC
USB TERMINAL
DV Image Processing
IC2301 VIC HDV
FR MI-COM.
DIF
DV TERMINAL
IC2000 VRP 2
VIDEO HEAD
Fig. 17 At a normal status, the image signal created by the camera is sent through DIGIC DV II to the memory card, and also through VIC HDV to the DV terminal. When USB is connected, the USB terminal and memory card are connected through the USB IC, and the DV image processing circuit and USB terminal are connected through B CHIP and USB IC.
20
6-5 Error Detection

If an abnormality has occurred in any rotation drive system (drum, capstan, reel, loading), operations prescribed by each mode take effect. The LCD indicates PLEASE REMOVE THE CASSETTE and blinks EJECT.
6-5-1 Error Detecting Conditions

The following table gives error detecting conditions.
Kind Drum error Condition Error detecting mode FG frequency when steady Error detecting level Error detecting time Capstan error Error detecting mode FG frequency when steady Error detecting level Error detecting time Reel error Error detecting mode Error detection Starting / steady 900Hz Starting: Beyond 80-150%. Steady : 30% max. Starting : 5sec. Steady : 0.5sec. Starting / steady 1347Hz Starting : 80% max. Steady : 60Hz max. Starting : 2sec. Steady : 2sec. Starting / Normal / UNLOAD Normally : The C-FG count per reel FG cycle is Starting : 3296 or more Steady : 2256 or more UNLOAD : Reel FG cycle is 1 sec or more (Take-up reel only for both) Loading error Error detecting mode Error detection M ode transfer M ode transfer time STANDBY-STOP : 6sec STANDBY-POPUP : 3sec STOP-PLAY : 3sec M ode SW T, S-REEL FG C-FG C-FG Detection D-FG
6-5-2 Processing after Error Detection

The following table shows processing after error detection.
Cassette in Drum error Capstan error Reel error Loading error Pop up Pop up ------Pop up Loading Pop up ------------Pop up During unloading Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop Loading completed Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop During tape running Error stop Error stop Error stop ------During mode transfer Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop
Pop up Error stop
: Error displayerror eject pop up error clear : Error displaySTOP position (not cleared unless EJECTED)
21
DISASSEMBLING
CONTENTS
1. Disassembling and Reassembling -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 Notes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 List of Supplies -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 1-1 Disassembling / Reassembling Flowchart -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 1-2 Separation of Bottom Cover ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4 1-3 Separation of Top Cover Assy --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5 1-4 Separation of Front Cover Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7 1-5 Separation of R-LCD Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9 1-6 Separation of Cassette Cover Assy -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11 1-7 Separation of CARD PCB ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 13 1-8 Separation of CVF Battery Case Unit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14 1-9 Separation of Camera Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 16 1-10 Separation of JACK PCB ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 18 1-11 Separation of MAIN PCB ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20 1-12 Separation of Main Holder Assy --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 23 1-13 Disassembly of Front Cover Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24 1-14 Separation of LCD Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25 1-15 Disassembly of Right Cover Assy ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 27 1-16 Disassembly of LCD Unit - 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 28 1-17 Disassembly of LCD Unit - 2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 29 1-18 Disassembly of LCD Hinge Unit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 31 1-19 Disassembly of CVF Battery Case Unit - 1 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 33 1-20 Disassembly of CVF Battery Case Unit - 2 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 35 1-21 Disassembly of CVF Battery Case Unit - 3 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 37 1-22 Disassembly of CVF Battery Case Unit - 4 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 39 1-23 Disassembly of Camera Unit - 1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 41 1-24 Disassembly of Camera Unit - 2 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 43 1-25 Disassembly of Lens Unit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 44 1-26 List of Screws Used ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 45 1-27 List of Disassembly Photos ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 46
HV20 E DISASSEMBLING
1. Disassembling and Reassembling

Notes
(1) When replacing the flat cable with a new one, allow it to remain folded the same as the original part. (2) The flat cable has a contact orientation to be engaged with the connector. Refer to the instructions in the disassembly procedure diagram and interconnection diagram for boards. Lateral engaging connector ( The instructions are given in the disassembly procedure diagram and board interconnection diagram.) : Contacts are positioned downward. (board side) : Contacts are positioned upward.
Metal contact (Pins face down)
:
Lengthwise engaging connector ( The instructions are given in the disassembly procedure diagram and board interconnection diagram.) Indicated by Arrowheads indicate the contacts, and the shafts indicate the noncontacts.
Metal contact
Metal contact (Pins face up)

:
Metal contact
(3) To secure screws, apply the Three Bond 1401C (CY9-8011-000) (4) If any part to be replaced has tape attached to it, be sure to reattach the tape at the same position when reassembling. (5) After detaching the Front Cover Unit, be sure to discharge the Main Capacitor. (Since a high voltage is applied to the Main Capacitor, take care not to receive electric shock or to short-circuit other parts.)
HV20 E DISASSEMBLING List of Supplies

Item Name Hanarl KS-39M Adhesive T ape, No. 354E (W (W (W L L L T : 9mm T : 10mm T : 10mm 50m 50m 30mm 0.15mm, UL type) DY9-3034-000 General-purpose 0.16mm, UL type) 0.055mm) CY9-8011-000 Adhesive Screw double-sided adhesive tape DY9-3057-000 General-purpose adhesive tape Black Adhesive T ape, No. 501F NIT T O NO. 31C T ape T hree Bond 1401C Item Number DY9-3053-000 Lubrication DY9-3032-000 General-purpose adhesive tape Purpose Remarks Cover
1-1 Disassembling / Reassembling Flowchart

(1) Find the replacement part on the chart, and disassemble it following the instructions on the chart. (2) Reassemble by reversing the disassembly procedures.
START
: MAIN FLOW : SUB FLOW : MAIN UNIT
1-2 Bottom Cover
1-3 Top Cover Ass'y
1-4 Front Cover Unit
1-13 Focus Dial Ass'y
1-5 R-LCD Unit
1-14 Speaker 1-14 LCD Unit 1-16 LCD Hinge Unit 1-17 LCD PCB 1-17 LCD 1-17 Back Light Ass'y
1-6 Cassette Cover Ass'y
1-7 CARD PCB
1-8 CVF Battery Case Unit
1-20 CVF PCB 1-20 CVF LCD 1-22 Battery Terminal
1-9 Flash Ass'y
1-9 Camera Recorder Unit
1-9 Camera Unit
1-24 Auto Focus Ass'y 1-24 CMOS Sensor Ass'y 1-28 Lens Unit
1-9 Recorder Unit
1-10 JACK PCB 1-11 MAIN PCB 1-11 REAR PCB
END
1-12 DMC III
1-2 Separation of Bottom Cover

(1) Remove eight screws (a 6, b 2), and detach the Bottom Cover. (2) Remove two screws (c 2). Open the LCD, disengage claw A, and detach the Eyecup. <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the Bottom Cover as shown in the figure below.
Claw A
Eyecup
LCD
B Pull Pull section B and disengage claw A. Eyecup (2)
(2)
(1) (2) - c (1) - a (1) - a Bottom Cover (1) - a (1) - a Note on Reassembling (1) (1) - a Bottom Cover (2) - c Press (1) - b
(1) - a
(1) - b (1) - a
a
4mm Metal M1.7
b
3mm Metal M1.7
c
5.5mm Metal M1.7 (self tap)
Press (1) - b (1) - b Fasten the screws with the Bottom Cover pressed to the arrow direction.
Fig. 1
1-3 Separation of Top Cover Assy

(1) Detach the Shoe Lid. (2) Remove four screws (d 4), and detach the Accessory Shoe. (3) Open the Cassette Cover, remove four screws (e 4), lift up the rear section, and detach the Top Cover Assy. Note : Be careful not to drop the screw shown in the figure below. (4) Disconnect the CN701, and separate the Top Cover Assy.
Shoe Lid
(2) - d
Accessory Shoe
Note (3) - e Be careful not to drop the screw.
(2) - d (1) (2) Top Cover Ass'y
(3) Lift up (3) - e (3) (3) - e (4) CN701 (3)
d
5mm Metal M1.7 Flat Head Screw
e
3mm Metal M1.7
Cassette Cover
Fig. 2
HV20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the Top Cover Assy as shown in the figure below.
Note on Reassembling (1) Top Heatsink Plate Fold the Mic Wire to the rear side so as to prevent it from going to the Cassette Cover side. Top Cover Ass'y Insert Top GND Plate
CN701
Cassette Cover 1. Connect the CN701, insert the front section of the Top Cover Ass'y, and attach the Top Cover Ass'y.
Treat the Mic Wire within this range. Be careful not to place it onto the Top GND Plate and Top Heatsink Plate.
Press Press Press e Fasten this screw first. Be careful not to drop it.
e 2. Four screws e should be fastened with the Top Cover Ass'y pressed against the main unit.
Fig. 3
1-4 Separation of Front Cover Unit

Note 1 : After separating the Front Cover Unit, be sure to discharge the Main Capacitor. (A high voltage is present on the circuit. Be careful not to receive electric shock or cause accidental contact with other parts.) Note 2 : Just before attaching the Front Cover Unit, perform Parallax adjustment after removing the Lens absorber. (Refer to SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT) Note 3 : When attaching/detaching Front Cover Unit, be careful not to shake the Auto Focus Assy of Camera Unit. Also take care not to touch the Auto Focus Assy. (The Auto Focus Assy requires fine adjustment.) (1) Detach the Grip Belt. Open the LCD and Jack Cover, remove eight screws (a 1, c 1, e 5, f 1), disconnect the CN3, and detach the Front Cover Unit. (2) Disconnect the CN100, and separate the Front Cover Unit. (3) Detach the Jack Cover.
a
4mm Metal M1.7
c
e
3mm Metal M1.7
f
4mm Metal M1.7 (self tap)
(1) - e Front Cover Unit
Jack Cover
(1) - e
(1) - e Open
Front Cover Unit (1) - f Grip Belt (1) - f (3)
Jack Cover
(1) (1) - e (2)
CN3
(1) (1) - a
LCD (1) - c (1) CN100 Note 1 Main Capacitor Note 2 Note 3
Discharge points Discharge resistance : Approx.1K
JACK PCB
Lens Absorber
Fig. 4
Auto Focus Assy Take care not to shake the Auto Focus Assy.
HV20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the Front Cover Unit as shown in the figure below.
Note on Reassembling (1) Take care not to pinch the flexible cable between the Front Cover Unit and the Main Unit. Fold Front Cover Unit CN3
Fold FRONT FPC Ass'y CN100
Front Cover Unit Flexible cable of the Focus Dial Ass'y 2. Fold the flexible cable as illustrated and insert it into the CN3.
1. Connect the FRONT FPC Ass'y to the CN100 and while folding it as illustrated, attach the Front Cover Unit
Front Cover Unit 3. Fasten the screws with the Front Cover Unit pressed to the arrow direction.
Fig. 5
1-5 Separation of R-LCD Unit

(1) Remove one screw (e 1), and detach the Top Heatsink Plate. (2) Remove seven screws (c 2, e 4, g 1), disconnect the CN103 and CN900, and detach the R-LCD Unit. Note : The screw g is not reusable. When the screw g has been removed, use a new service part.
(1) - e
Top Heatsink Plate
(1) CN900
(2)
(2) - g (2) - e R-LCD Unit
(2) - c (2) CN103 (2)
(2) - e
(2) - e
(2) - e
c
e
3mm Metal M1.7
g
3mm Metal M1.7 NK Setscrew
Fig. 6
HV20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the R-LCD Unit as shown in the figure below.
Note on Reassembling (1) Take care not to deform the sheet metal. Top Right Key
R-LCD Unit
Take care not to damage the surface of the Top Right Key.
1. Attach the R-LCD Unit to the main unit.
CN900 LCD FPC Ass'y
Lithium 2nd Battery CARD PCB Speaker Wire
Treat the remaining part of the Speaker Wire within this range. Engage the claw. CN103 2. Connect the flexible cable and cable to the CN103 and CN900, and then fasten the screws. Speaker Wire
Fig. 7
10
1-6 Separation of Cassette Cover Assy

(1) Disconnect the CN100, peel off the NO.31C Tape, and remove three screws (h 3). (2) Open the Cassette Cover Assy, and remove three screws (c 1, h 1, i 1). (3) Disengage the claws while lifting the lower section of the Cassette Cover Assy, and detach the Cassette Cover Assy, Cassette Hook and Hook Spring Note : Take care not to lose the Spring.
Cassette Hook (2) - c
c
h
4mm Metal M1.7
i
(3) (3)
CN100
Hook Spring
(2) - i (3) (1)
(2) (1)
No.31C Tape (9 20mm)
(1) - h
Cassette Cover Ass'y (1) - h
(2) - h
(2) - c Cassette Cover Ass'y Claw (2) - h Claws
(2) - i
Lift up
Fig. 8
11
HV20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the Cassette Hook and Hook Spring as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the Cassette Cover Assy as shown in the figure below. (3) Attach the NO.31C Tape as shown in the figure below. <Instruction for Supply> Cassette Cover Assy : NO.31C Tape (DY9-3057-000)
Note on Reassembling (1) Cassette Hook Main Holder Ass'y Slide Hook Spring
Note on Reassembling (2) Cassette Cover Ass'y Claw
Claws Hook Attach the Hook Spring to the Cassette Hook and hang the end of the Hook Spring on the hook. Slide the Cassette Hook along the Main Holder Ass'y as it is and attach it to the Main Holder Ass'y.
Put up the Cassette Cover Ass'y, engage it with three claws of the Main Holder Ass'y and attach it to the Main Holder Ass'y. After attachment, carry out the Cassette Hook operation check. CN100 Connect the CN100, and then fix the flexible cable with the NO.31C Tape.
Note on Reassembling (3) Bottom Frame
CARD PCB
Fix the flexible cable to the Bottom Frame and the Main NO.31C Tape Holder Ass'y with NO.31C (9 20mm) Tape with the tape center aligned with the centerline of the flexible cable. Attachment reference : Less than 1mm
Align the flexible cable with the outline of the Bottom Frame.
Take care not to extend onto the dowels. Main Holder Ass'y
Convex section Attachment Align the convex section of the flexible reference : Less than 1mm cable and the NO.31C Tape with the edge of the Main Holder Ass'y.
Fig. 9
12
1-7 Separation of CARD PCB

(1) Disconnect the CN104, remove two screws (e 2), and detach the CARD PCB. (2) Unsolder (), disconnect the CN102, and detach the Lithium 2nd Battery and CARD FPC. (3) Remove two screws (e 2), and detach the Heatsink Plate. Note : Take care not to deform the Heatsink Plate. <Note on Reassembling> (1) Before using the CARD FPC supplied as a service part, allow it to fold at the position shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the CARD FPC as shown in the figure below.
(1) - e
CARD FPC Lithium 2nd Battery (1) (2)
CARD PCB
CN104
(1)
Solder CN102
(2)
Heatsink Plate (3) (3) - e
e
3mm Metal M1.7
Note on Reassembling (1) Fold it slightly
CARD FPC
Note on Reassembling (2) CARD FPC CN104 CARD PCB CN104 Push into the depth. CN102
MAIN PCB CN102
Folding in a crest form Folding in a trough form

Fig. 10
13
1-8 Separation of CVF Battery Case Unit

(1) Open the Rear Jack Cover, remove five screws (e 4, i 1), and detach the Rear Cover and Rear Jack Cover. (2) Remove four screws (e 4), and to ensure that CVF Battery Case Unit is pulled up. (3) Disconnect the CN1501 and CN3201, and separate the CVF Battery Case Unit.
Rear Cover CN1501
(1) - e
(1) - e
(1) (3) (2) - e
(3) CN3201 (3)
Rear Jack Cover
(1)
(2) - e
(1) - e
e
3mm Metal M1.7
i
CVF Battery Case Unit
(1) - i
(2) - e
Fig. 11
14
HV20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the CVF Battery Case Unit as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the Rear Cover as shown in the figure below.
Note on Reassembling (1) Top Frame Ass'y Main Holder Ass'y
1- e CN1501
Put the Top Frame Ass'y close against the Main Holder Ass'y. 2- e Shoe Base Put it close against the standing sections. CN3201
1. Connect the CN1501 and CN3201. Attach the CVF Battery Case Unit and fasten screw 1- e . Standing section Bottom Frame Top Frame Ass'y Put it close against the standing section. (3) - e
Standing sections 2. Put the Shoe Base close against the the two standing sections of the Top Frame Ass'y. Fasten screw 2- e . Note on Reassembling (2) Rear Jack Cover Dowels Dowels 3. Put it close against the the standing section of the Bottom Frame. Fasten screw 3- e . Engage
Opening
DC Jack Rear Cover Rear Cover
Attach the Rear Jack Cover. Insert the opening of the Rear Cover into the DC Jack and engage the two dowels.
Fig. 12
15
1-9 Separation of Camera Unit

Note : Be careful not to shake the Auto Focue Assy. Also take care not to touch the Auto Focus Assy. (1) Remove one screw (e 1), disconnect the CN1502, CN1503, and detach the Flash Assy. (2) Disconnect the CN1000 and CN1040 (B to B), CN1200, and CN1600, remove four screws (e 4), and detach the Camera Unit. (3) Disconnect the CN1700, and separate the Camera Unit.
Flash Ass'y CN1600
(2)
CN1000 (B to B) (1) CN1700 (1) - e (1) CN1503 CN1502 (3) (2) (2) (2) CN1200 CN1040 (B to B)
e
3mm Metal M1.7
(2) - e
Camera Unit
Note
(2) - e
Auto Focus Ass'y Take care not to shake the Auto Focus Ass'y and take load.
Fig. 13
(2) - e
16
HV20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the Camera Unit as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the Flash Assy as shown in the figure below.
Note on Reassembling (1) 1. Connect the CN1700 and while folding flexible cable of the Auto Focus Ass'y, attach the Camera Unit. Because the CN1700 is hard to insert, take care not to damage the flexible cable. CN1700 Flexible cable of the Auto Focus Ass'y
2. Position the Camera Unit in the arrow direction and fix it with screws in the order shown in the figure. The Camera Unit should be set at the upper position.
(2) - e 2 1 Hold the Camera Unit until it is put close against the Main Unit.
(1) - e Camera Unit 3. Place the remaining part of the IS FPC between the Lens Unit and the MAIN PCB. Push in Camera Unit Back side (3) - e (3) - e
CN1600
The Camera Unit should be set at the upper position. 2 1
IS FPC
Note on Reassembling (2)
Hold the Camera Unit until it is put close against the Main Unit.
Flash Ass'y Hold the Flash Ass'y until it is put close against the Main Unit. Screws e should be fastened with the Flash Ass'y pressed against the main unit.
Fig. 14
17
1-10 Separation of JACK PCB

Note 1 : In disassembling, make sure that the Main Capacitor has been discharged. (Refer to 1-4 Separation of Front Cover Unit.) (1) Remove three screws (j 3), disconnect the CN501, and detach the JACK PCB. Note 2 : When removing the CN501, be careful not to cut the flexible cable by lifting the JACK PCB forcibly. (2) Unsolder () at two places, and detach the AL-EL Capacitor. (3) Remove one screw (e 1), and detach the Bottom Frame and Bottom Shield.
Note 2
Jack PCB
e
3mm Metal M1.7
j
2.5mm Bronze M1.7
Be careful not to cut.
JACK PCB
CN501 (1)
(1)
(3) Double Sided Tape (Back side) (1)
(1) - j
Solder
AL-EL Capacitor Bottom Shield

Fig. 15
(3) Bottom Frame
(3) - e
18
HV20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the JACK PCB as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the Bottom Shield as shown in the figure below. (3) Attach the Bottom Frame as shown in the figure below.
Note on Reassembling (1) CN501 JACK PCB Sit on
AL-EL Capacitor
MAIN PCB
Turn the JACK PCB outward. MAIN-JACK FPC 1. Place the JACK PCB at the position shown in the figure, fold the MAIN-JACK FPC, and insert it into the CN501. Note on Reassembling (2) Bottom Frame Double Sided Tape (Back side) 2. While being careful not to cut the MAIN-JACK FPC, turn the JACK PCB outward. (This makes the AL-EL Capacitor sit on the MAIN PCB.)
Note on Reassembling (3) The connectors should not be covered with the flexible cable. Capstan Motor flexible cable Dowel Push in Bottom Frame Dowel Insert the tip of the Bottom Frame.
Attachment reference : Less than 0.5mm
Attachment reference : Less than 0.5mm Bottom Shield
Connectors Push in the Bottom Frame, position with respect to the two dowels, and attach the Bottom Frame.
Fig. 16
19
1-11 Separation of MAIN PCB

(1) Peel off the NO.31C Tape, remove two screws (j 2), and detach the MAIN PCB Shield, Grand Plate, and Fuse Label. (2) Remove three screws (j 3), disengage rib A and B, disconnect the CN300 to CN303 and CN2000, and detach the MAIN PCB, REAR PCB, and HDMI FPC. Note : To prevent damage to the EJECT SW of the REAR PCB, be sure to close the Main Holder Assy. (3) Disconnect the CN101, CN2800, and CN2830, and detach the MAIN-JACK FPC, REAR PCB, and HDMI FPC from MAIN PCB. (4) Unsolder () at two places, and detach the Rear Wire from REAR PCB.
1 Rib A HDMI FPC Disengage rib A and B in this order. 2 CN2830 Rib B MAIN PCB Shield MAIN-JACK FPC (1) No.31C Tape (9 15mm) (2) (1) CN2800 CN2830 (3) (2) - j (3) (2) Solder REAR PCB (2) (4) Rear Wire (2) - j
(3)
CN101 (1) Fuse Label
MAIN PCB HDMI FPC
CN301 CN2000
CN302 CN303
CN300
(1) - j
Grand Plate
j
2.5mm Bronze M1.7
MAIN PCB
Fig. 17
20
HV20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the Rear Wire as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the MAIN-JACK FPC as shown in the figure below. (3) Attach the MAIN PCB as shown in the figure below.
Note on Reassembling (1) REAR PCB Black
Note on Reassembling (2) MAIN-JACK FPC
JACK PCB CN501 Rear Wire Red Solder Note on Reassembling (3) MAIN-JACK FPC CN2800 MAIN PCB CN2800 REAR PCB CN101 Short Long
MAIN PCB CN2800
Push HDMI FPC
CN2800 Connect the CN2800, push the HDMI FPC, and make it remain folded. Fold it smoothly
1. Connect the MAIN-JACK FPC, REAR PCB, and HDMI FPC to the MAIN PCB connectors. MAIN PCB
HDMI FPC Folding in a crest form Folding in a trough form HDMI FPC 2 Rib A Rib A HDMI FPC
CN2000 CN301 CN303 CN302 CN300
Rib B After attaching the MAIN PCB, connect the CN300. 2. Connect the CN301 to CN303 and CN2000, and then attach the MAIN PCB while inserting rib A and B.
1 CN2830 Rib B HDMI FPC should be set at the outside position.
Insert the rib B and A in this order.
Fig. 18
21
HV20 E DISASSEMBLING (4) Attach the REAR PCB as shown in the figure below. (5) Attach the Fuse Label and NO.31C Tape as shown in the figure below. (6) Attach the MAIN PCB Shield as shown in the figure below. <Instruction for Supply> Main Holder Assy : NO.31C Tape (DY9-3057-000)
Note on Reassembling (4) Eject Switch Main Holder Ass'y
MAIN PCB Shield CN1200 CN102
Insert into the Main Holder Ass'y.
REAR PCB Dowels Position with respect to the two dowels and attach the REAR PCB. To prevent damage to the EJECT Switch, be sure to close the Main Holder Ass'y. Note on Reassembling (5)
Attachment reference : 0.3mm Make it hit against the CN1200.
Attachment reference : 0.3mm Make it hit against the CN102.
Push in
Fix the flexible cable with NO.31C Tape with the tape center aligned with the centerline of the flexible cable. Attachment reference : 1mm
wall of the CN3201. Main Holder Attachment Ass'y reference : Loading Motor flexible 1mm Attachment cable is placed below reference : the Main 1mm Holder Ass'y. Fix the flexible cable with NO.31C Tape with the NO.31C Tape tape center aligned with (9 15mm) the edge ofthe Main Holder. Main Holder Ass'y Fuse Label
Grand Plate Align with the end of the Grand Plate. CN3201 Attachment reference : 1mm Align with the side
Before attaching the Grand Plate, attach the Fuse Label. Cover the flexible cable completely.
Fig. 19
22
1-12 Separation of Main Holder Assy

(1) Remove three screws (k 3), and detach the Ground Plate. (2) Open the Main Holder Assy, and detach it by pulling it out of the DMC III.
DMC III
(2)
(2)
Ground Plate (1) - k
Main Holder Ass'y
k
3.4mm Metal M1.4 Stepped Screw
Fig. 20
23
1-13 Disassembly of Front Cover Unit

(1) Remove three screws (i 3), and detach the Focus Dial Assy and GND Plate. Note : Take care not to deform the GND Plate. <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the GND Plate as shown in the figure below. (2) Before using the Focus Dial Assy supplied as a service part, provide preliminary folding at the position indicated in the figure below.
Push out lightly (1) Focus Dial Ass'y
(1) (1) - i
GND Plate (1) - i Note on Reassembling (1) GND Plate Dowels Focus Dial FPC Note on Reassembling (2)
Insert
Focus Dial Ass'y
i
Hole Insert into the hole, position with respect to the dowels, and attach the GND Plate.
Folding in a crest form
Fig. 21
24
1-14 Separation of LCD Unit

(1) Remove two screws (a 2), and detach the Tripod Base. (2) Open the LCD Unit. Remove five screws (a 1, c 1, i 3), and detach the opening/closing SW part of LCD FPC Assy, Heatsink Plate, Speaker, and LCD Unit. Note 1 : When mounting the opening/closing Switch part of the LCD FPC Assy or unmounting it, be sure to open the LCD Unit (to prevent possible damage to the Switch part). Note 2 : Never turn the Hinge Bracket B on the Spring side of the Hinge Assy; keep it at the position where the LCD is open all the time (to prevent lubricant from splashing). Note 3 : Be careful when removing the screw shown in the red frame in the illustration, which is coated with screw lock adhesive. (3) Unsolder () at two places, and detach the Speaker Wire.
a
4mm Metal M1.7
c
i
Note 2
Spring Hinge Bracket B (2) Speaker Solder () Heatsink Plate (2) (3) (2) - i (2) (2)
a
(1) - a Speaker Wire (2) - c
a
LCD Unit (1) Tripod Base
(2) Opening/closing SW section (2) - i
(2) - a
Fig. 22
25
HV20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the LCD Unit as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the Speaker and Speaker Wire as shown in the figure below. (3) Attach the Heatsink Plate as shown in the figure below. (4) Attach the Tripod Base as shown in the figure below. <Instruction for Supply> Three Bond 1401C (CY9-8011-000)
Note on Reassembling (1) LCD FPC Ass'y Dowel A
Note on Reassembling (2) Speaker Black Dowel Ribs Dowel B Red
Dowel A Dowel C Solder section Ribs Speaker Wire
Position with respect to dowel B and C, attach the LCD Unit and insert LCD FPC Ass'y into dowels A. Note on Reassembling (3) Heatsink Plate Speaker Wire D
Pass the Speaker Wire through between ribs and dowel.
After fixing screws, the Heatsink Plate and the Right Cover should be close together. Heatsink Plate Speaker Wire
E Opening/closing SW section
The soldered section on the Speaker should not touch the Heatsink Plate.
Apply the three Bond Take care not to pinch 1401C to the the Speaker Wire. screw a .
Passing the Speaker Wire through the section D and the Open/close SW section through the section E, attach Heatsink Plate. Note on Reassembling (4) Tripod Base
Make it hit against.
Fig. 23
26
1-15 Disassembly of Right Cover Assy

(1) Remove one screw (i 1), and detach the LED Window. (2) Open the Card Lid, and detach the Card Lid Shaft and Card Lid. (3) Detach the Blind Sheet, LCD Cushion and LCD Gray Cushion. <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the Card Lid and Card Lid Shaft as shown in the figure below.
i
Blind Sheet Double Sided Tape Right Cover
(1) - i (3) (3) LCD Cushion
LED Window (1) (3) (3) Open (2) LCD Gray Cushion
(2) (2)
Card Lid Shaft
Card Lid Note on Reassembling (1) Card Lid
Blind Sheet (1) - i LED Window Card Lid Shaft Push against Card Lid Shaft With the Card Lid closed, insert the Card Lid Shaft and attach the Card Lid.
Fig. 24
27
1-16 Disassembly of LCD Unit - 1

Note : Never turn the Hinge Bracket B on the Spring side of the Hinge Assy; keep it in a position where the LCD is open all the time (to prevent lubricant from splashing). (1) Turn the LCD Hinge Unit in the direction indicated in the figure shown below, and then remove two screws (a 2). (2) Disengage claws A, B, C, D, E and F (six positions), and detach the LCD Top Cover. (3) Disconnect the CN901, and detach the LCD Hinge Unit. <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the LCD Hinge Unit and LCD FPC as shown in the figure below. (2) To attach the LCD Top Cover, insert Claws E and F first, and then Claws B, D, A and C in this order.
Note
(1)
LCD Hinge Unit
Spring
CN901
Hinge Bracket B
(3)
(1) - a
Claw A
Claw B
(2)
LCD Top Cover Claw C Note on Reassembling (1) LCD FPC Ass'y Claw D Bend the surplus part. CN901 LCD GND Plate Bend the LCD FPC to the edge of the LCD GND Plate. LCD FPC
Claw E Claw F
a
4mm Metal M1.7
Note on Reassembling (2) Push in Claw A LCD Top Cover Claw B
Claw C Claw D Claw E Claw F

Fig. 25
28
1-17 Disassembly of LCD Unit - 2

(1) Peel off NO.31C Tape ( 2), disconnect the CN902 and CN50, unsolder (), and detach the LCD PCB section, Back Light Assy, and LCD. (2) Remove one screw (m 1), and detach the LCD Insulator and LCD PCB. (3) Detach the LCD Key Assy. Note : The LCD Key Assy is not reusable. When it has been removed, use a new service part.
LCD B Cover LCD Key Ass'y LCD Back Light Ass'y LCD Insulator (3)
(2) - m LCD PCB LCD GND Plate Solder () (1) (1) (1) (1) (2) (1) CN902 CN50
m
NO.31C Tape (9 14mm) NO.31C Tape (9 9mm)
Fig. 26
2.5mm Metal M1.7
29
HV20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the LCD Key Assy as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the from LCD GND Plate to LCD as shown in the figure below.
Note on Reassembling (1) LCD B Cover
Back Light Assy
Rib
Drop
Rib Pass through the hole. LCD KEY Assy LCD PCB
Press Spring section Ribs
LCD GND Plate
4. Press the Back Light Assy against the Spring section of the LCD GND Plate, and engage it with six ribs. BACK LIGHT FPC LCD FPC
Ribs
LCD GND Plate
1. Make LCD PCB hit against the rib of the LCD GND Plate and attach the LCD PCB. LCD GND Plate LCD Insulator LCD PCB Rib Rib LCD KEY FPC
LCD B Cover A Ribs 5. Insert into section A of the LCD B Cover and six ribs. BACK LIGHT FPC CN902 LCD PCB Spring section Drop Press
Attachment reference : 1mm Attachment reference
2. Pass LCD Insulator between LCD PCB and LCD GND Plate. LCD
Solder height: +1.2mm LCD Insulator

Align with the end of the LCD GND Plate. Attachment reference : 1mm
NO.31C Tape NO.31C Tape (9 14mm) Attachment (9 9mm) LCD GND reference : Take care not to Plate 1mm extend onto the LCD FPC Align with the end CN902. of the LCD Insulator. Rib 6. After attaching NO.31C Tape, connect the LCD FPC. 3. Press the LCD against the Spring section After soldering Back Light FPC, attach the of the LCD GND Plate, and engage it with rib. NO.31C Tape.
Fig. 27
30
1-18 Disassembly of LCD Hinge Unit

Note 1 : Never turn the Hinge Bracket B on the Spring side of the Hinge Assy; keep it in a position where the LCD is open all the time (to prevent lubricant from splashing). (1) Disengage four claws A, and detach the Hinge T Cover and Hinge B Cover. (2) Detach the LCD FPC Assy. Note 2 : When disassembling/reassembling the Panel Open Switch section of the LCD FPC Assy, be sure to keep the SW Plate OFF (to prevent damage to the Panel Open Switch).
Hinge B Cover Claws A
Tweezers
Claws A
(1) (1)
Hinge Ass'y (2) Hinge T Cover
Note 1
Note 2
LED FPC Ass'y SW Plate (OFF position)
Spring
Hinge Bracket B
Fig. 28
31
HV20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) When using the LCD FPC Assy supplied as a service part, fold it as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the LCD FPC Assy as shown in the figure below. (3) Attach the Hinge T Cover and Hinge B Cover as shown in the figure below. <Instruction for Supply> Winding part of LCD FPC Assy : Hanarl KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)
Note on Reassembling (1) Attach in a trough-folded form.
Double Sided Tape
Note on Reassembling (3) Hinge B Cover
Fold it slightly.
Fold it slightly. Folding in a crest form Folding in a trough form Note on Reassembling (2) Be sure to house the flexible cable within this range.
Hinge T Cover
Make sure that the Switch plate is in the OFF position and attach with respect to the dowel and hole. Panel Open Switch
Dowel Hole
Wind 2-1/2 turns
Insert
Switch Plate (OFF position) Instruction for Supply
LCD FPC Ass'y
Hanarl : KS-39M
Fig. 29
32
1-19 Disassembly of CVF Battery Case Unit - 1

(1) Detach the AAS Connector Assy (by sliding). (2) Remove one screw (n 1), and detach the Right Top Key and LED Key Window. (3) Remove three screws (e 2, n 1), and detach the Shoe Base.
AAS Connector Ass'y
(1) (3) - n
(2) - n (3) - e
(2)
Shoe Base (3)
(2) LED key Window Right Top Key
(3) - e
e
3mm Metal M1.7
n
Fig. 30
33
HV20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the Shoe Base as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the LED Key Window as shown in the figure below. (3) Attach the AAS Connector Assy as shown in the figure below.
Note on Reassembling (1) Shoe Base A
Right Top Key
CVF FPC Ass'y B Dowels Pass CVF FPC Ass'y through section A and B, position with respect to the dowel and attach the Shoe Base. Note on Reassembling (3)
LED Key Window Take care not to damage the Right Top Key, position with respect to the cutout of the Right Top Key and attach the LED Key Window.
When attaching the CVF FPC Ass'y, perform positioning with dowels (with the contact part facing up) and slide.
Dowels CVF FPC Ass'y
Fig. 31
34

Note 1 : Since the CN4101 is Back flip connector, be careful when attaching/detaching the flexible cable. (1) Remove three screws (n 3), disconnect the CN4101 and CN4102, and detach the CVF PCB and BATT Case Plate. Note 2 : Take care not to deform the BATT Case Plate. (2) Disengage two claws A, and detach the CVF FPC Assy. (3) Disengage two claws B, and detach the CVF Reflector, CVF Diffuser, CVF LCD Cushion, and CVF LCD section. (4) Disengage four claws C, and detach the CVF Panel Holder 2, CVF LCD, and CVF Panel Holder 1. Note 3 : Since the CVF LCD is made entirely of glass, be careful handling it.
CVF Panel Holder 1 Claws C CVF LCD CVF Panel Holder 2 Note 1 Disconnect Claws C
CVF FPC Ass'y
(4)
CN4101 (Back flip connector) CVF LCD Cushion Open CVF PCB CVF Diffuser CVF Reflector Claws B Claws A
CVF LCD section
CVF FPC Ass'y BATT Case Plate
(3) CN4101 (1)
(1)
(2)
Dowels E (1) BATT Case Plate
CN4102 (1) - n CVF PCB Dowels D

(1) - n
Fig. 32
35
HV20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the CVF Panel Holder 2, CVF LCD, and CVF Panel Holder 1 as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the CVF Diffuser and CVF Reflector as shown in the figure below. (3) Attach the CVF FPC Assy as shown in the figure below. (4) Attach the BATT Case Plate as shown in the figure below. (5) Attach the CVF PCB as shown in the figure below.
Note on Reassembling (1) CVF Panel Holder 2 CVF LCD
Note on Reassembling (3) CVF LCD FPC F G
The step difference side should face the CVF Panel Holder 1 side.
Bend
CVF Panel Holder 1 Note on Reassembling (2) CVF Diffuser Make it hit against the wall.
Engage the claw of the section F and dowels, push in the section G and hold the CVF FPC Assy. Note on Reassembling (4) CVF FPC Assy Dowels E
Dowels
CVF LCD 1. Insert
Dowel D CVF Reflector Dowel D CVF LCD FPC 2. Attach Less than +0.3mm When attach the CVF Reflector, protrusion should be 0.3mm or shorter. CVF LCD FPC Claws B CVF LCD FPC Dowel H Ribs Pass the CVF FPC Assy and CVF LCD FPC through, insert into dowel E and engage dowel D. Note on Reassembling (5) CN4102
Bend
Dowel H Connect the CVF LCD FPC, position with respect to dowels H and attach the CVF PCB.
CVF Diffuser Bend the CVF LCD FPC, position with respect to the ribs and push in claws B.
Fig. 33
36

(1) Disengage two claws A, and detach the CVF Holder, CVF Knob Absorber, CVF Diopter Knob, and CVF Lens Holder. Note : Take care not to deform the CVF Holder. (2) Disengage two claws B, and detach the Eyepiece Lens.
CVF Holder
(1)
(1)
CVF Knob Absorber
CVF Diopter Knob (1)
Claws A
CVF Lens Holder (1) NO.31C Tape (6 10mm)
Eyepiece Lens
(2)
Claws B
Fig. 34
37
HV20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the Eyepiece Lens as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the CVF Diopter Knob and CVF Knob Absorber as shown in the figure below. (3) Attach the CVF Holder as shown in the figure below. (4) To prevent intrusion of dust, attach the NO. 31C Tape as shown in the figure below. <Instruction for Supply> CVF Diopter Knob : Hanarl KS-39M (DY9-3053-000) CVF Knob Absorber : Hanarl KS-39M (DY9-3053-000) CVF BATT Case : NO.31C Tape (DY9-3057-000)
CVF BATT Case
Note on Reassembling (2) CVF Knob Absorber CVF Diopter Knob Groove
Insert the CVF BATT Case Rail section into the groove. CVF Lens Holder Eyepiece Lens Align the non-chamfered sections and attach. Note on Reassembling (3) Claw A-1 CVF Lens Holder CVF BATT Case Rail section CVF Holder
Claw A-2
Widen section C a little and engage claw A-1 and A-2 in this order. After attachment, check if the CVF Diopter Knob and CVF Lens Holder operates smoothly. No.31C Tape (6 10mm) Instruction for Supply Hanarl : KS-39M
Attachment reference : 1mm Attachment reference : 0.5mm Cover the hole completely.
CVF Knob Absorber
CVF Diopter Knob Entire sliding surface

Fig. 35
38

(1) Remove three screws (o 3), disengage two claws, and detach the Battery Terminal. (2) Unsolder () at three places, and detach the Battery Terminal Wire. (3) Remove one screw (n 1), and detach the BATT Case Holder, BATT Lock Spring, BATT Lock Knob, and Reset Key. Note : Take care not to lose the BATT Lock Spring.
CVF BATT Case
Battery Terminal
Battery Terminal Wire (1) Claws Solder () (Back side) (2) (2) (2)
(1) - o
(3) (3)
BATT Lock Knob BATT Lock Spring Reset Key
n
(3) - n BATT Case Holder
o
Fig. 36
39
HV20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the Battery Terminal and Battery Terminal Wire as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the BATT Lock Knob, BATT Lock Spring, and BATT Case Holder as shown in the figure below. <Instruction for Supply> CVF BATT Case sliding rail section : Hanarl KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)
Note on Reassembling (1) 1. Fold at 90 or more and pass through the hole. Battery Terminal
Battery Terminal
Contact section
Solder () Contamination and 2. Fold over deformation in the and solder. contact section are not allowed.
Red
Black
Insert Yellow
Battery Terminal Wire Solder the Battery Terminal Wire, insert contact section into the hole, and attach the Battery Terminal. Note on Reassembling (2) Rib BATT Lock Knob
Rib
Claws
Engage the two claws. After attachment, check if the Battery Terminal contact section operates smoothly. Dowels
Boss Rail Position with respect to the rail and boss and insert the BATT Lock Knob. Instruction for Supply Hanarl : KS-39M
Shaft BATT Case Holder BATT Lock Knob BATT Lock Spring While pushing in the BATT Lock Spring, engage two dowels, rib, and shaft. After attachment, check if the BATT Lock Knob operates smoothly.
CVF BATT Case sliding rail section

Fig. 37
40
1-23 Disassembly of Camera Unit - 1

Note 1 : Be careful not to shake the Auto Focue Assy. Also take care not to touch the Auto Focus Assy. Place so that the Auto Focus Assy faces upward. (1) Remove three screws (e 3), and detach the Rear Heatsink Plate and Heatsink. (2) Remove two screws (i 2), detach the Lens Holder, and peel off the NO.31C Tape. Note 2 : Take care not to deform the Lens Holder. (3) Remove one screw (g 1), and detach the Top Frame Assy. Note 3 : When removing the screws in the red frame on the illustration below, take care not to damage them. When reassembling them, use new ones.
Note 1 (3) - g
Take care not to shake the Auto Focus Assy and take load.
Top Frame Assy
(3)
Heatsink Rear Heatsink Plate NO31C Tape (9 15mm) (1) (1) - e (2) (2)
(2) - i (1) - e Lens Holder
e
3mm
g
3mm Metal M1.7 NK Setscrew
i
(2) - i
Metal M1.7
Fig. 38
41
HV20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the Top Frame Assy as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the NO.31C Tape and Lens Holder as shown in the figure below. (3) Attach the Heatsink as shown in the figure below.
Top Frame Assy
Note on Reassembling (3) Attachment reference Elements
Insert Dowel Attachment reference
Lens Unit Note on Reassembling (2) Lens Holder Screw holes B NO.31C Tape Screw holes
Cover the three elements completely.
Attach the NO.31C Tape so that it covers the edge section of sheet metal ranging from the trough R up to the right edge of the round hole.
The Tape should fully cover the edge section of sheet metal ranging from the end point of the R to the center of the round hole. NO.31C Tape (915mm)
A Push against Push against Fold the remaining section of Tape to the back side. The section of Tape may come off.
Put section A and B close against the Camera Unit and align with the screw holes.
Fig. 39
42
1-24 Disassembly of Camera Unit - 2

Note 1 : Be careful not to shake the Auto Focus Assy. Also take care not to touch the Auto Focus Assy. Place so that the Auto Focus Assy faces upward. (1) Remove two screws (p 2), and detach the Auto Focus Assy. (2) Remove three screws (q 3), and detach the CMOS Sensor Assy, Lens Spacer, CMOS Sensor Absorber, UV Filter, and Top Gasket. Note 2 : When attaching/detaching the CMOS Sensor Assy, never apply too much force to the PCB. (For prevent the Sensor from breaking away from the Assy) (3) Detach the Lens Absorber and peel off the NO.31C Tape. <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the IS FPC of Lens Unit as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the NO.31C Tape as shown in the figure below. (3) Attach the Auto Focus Assy as shown in the figure below. <Instruction for Supply> NO.31C Tape (DY9-3057-000)
p
Face thick side toward Lens side
Lens Lens Unit (3)
q
CMOS Sensor
UV Filter
Lens Absorber
(2) (1) Auto Focus Assy
Top Gasket (2) UV Filter CMOS Sensor Absorber Lens Spacer NO.31C Tape (9 25mm) Note on Reassembling (1),(2) (2) - q CMOS Sensor Assy IS FPC Folding in a trough form (3) (1) - p
(2) - q
Edge of the backing (Back side of IS FPC)
Attachment reference: 1 mm
Attachment reference: Center of the sheet metal 0.8mm NO.31C Tape (9 25mm) Align IS FPC with the edge of the backing and fold it in a trough-folded form slightly.
Fig. 40
Fasten this screw first.
Auto Focus Assy
43
1-25 Disassembly of Lens Unit

(1) Remove five screws (i 4, l 1), unsolder (), and detach the IG Meter, PZ Motor, Photo-Interrupter, and SR Head.
SR Head
Hook
IG Meter
Dowel Solder
NO.31C Tape (8 16mm)
Solder Hook
IG Meter
RR FPC Dowels
(1) -
SR Head (1) - l
Photo-Interrupter
(1) - PZ Motor
(1) - i
i
l
(1) - i (1) - i
Fig. 41
(1) -
44
1-26 List of Screws Used

SYMBOL SYMBOL
PARTS NO.
REMARKS
ILLUST
PARTS NO.
REMARKS
ILLUST
XA1-7170-407
M1.7-4.0mm (Metal)
4mm
XA9-1663-000
M1.7-2.5mm (Bronze)
2.5mm
XA9-1706-000
M1.7-3.0mm (Metal) Self Tap M1.7-5.5mm (Metal) Flat Head Screw M1.7-5.0mm (Metal)
3mm
XA9-1167-000
Stepped Screw M1.4-3.4mm (Metal) Self Tap M1.7-3.0mm (Metal)
3.4mm
XA4-9170-557
5.5mm
YB1-0405-000
3mm
XA1-3170-507
5mm
m XA1-7170-257
M1.7-2.5mm (Metal)
2.5mm
XA1-7170-307
M1.7-3.0mm (Metal)
3mm
XA4-9170-507
Self Tap M1.7-5.0mm (Metal) Self Tap M1.7-3.5mm (Metal) Self Tap M1.7-5.5mm (Metal) Self Tap M1.4-5.0mm (Metal)
5mm
XA9-1772-000
Self Tap M1.7-4.0mm (Metal) NK screw M1.7-3.0mm (Metal)
4mm
XA4-9170-357
3.5mm
XA9-0610-000
3mm
XA4-9170-557
5.5mm
XA9-1708-000
M1.7-4.0mm (Metal)
4mm
XA4-9140-507
5mm
XA4-9170-407
Self Tap M1.7-4.0mm (Metal)
4mm
45
1-27 List of Disassembly Photos
Right Side
Front Side
Top Side
Bottom Side
Front Cover Unit
R-LCD Unit
46
Camera Recorder Unit
CVF Battery Unit
Camera Unit
LCD Hinge Unit
LCD Unit
47
SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

CONTENTS
1. Maintenance Tools ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 1-1 List of Maintenance Tools -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 2. Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 2-1 Setting A ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 2-2 Setting B ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 2-3 Setting C ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4 3. Service Modes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5 3-1 Outline ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5 3-2 How to Change Over to Service Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5 3-3 How to Operate Wireless Remote Controller in Service Mode -------------------------------------------------------------------- 6 3-4 Indication in Service Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7 4. Description of Service Modes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8 4-1 SD Specification Error Rate ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8 4-2 HD Specification Error Rate ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9 4-3 Mechanical Error Indication ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 4-3-1 Indications in Service Mode ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 4-3-2 Indications in Shortcut Mode ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 4-4 Cleaning Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11 4-5 Commands Particular to Camera ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11 4-6 Checking the Lens Resetting --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12 4-7 Functional Check of Control Keys and Switches ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13 4-7-1 MODE MI-COM Input Port ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13 4-7-2 MODE MI-COM A/D Port ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 13 4-7-3 FR MI-COM Input Port ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14 4-7-4 FR MI-COM A/D Port ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14 5. Adjustment Procedures ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 15 5-1 Adjustment Items in Part Replacement ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15 5-2 CMOS Section Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17 5-2-1 Iris Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17 5-2-2 FPG Compensation --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 18 5-3 Camera Section Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19 5-3-1 WB Adjustment (1) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19 5-3-2 Color Balance Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20 5-3-3 WB Adjustment (2) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20 5-3-4 WB Adjustment (3) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20 5-3-5 Flash Memory Writing ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20 5-3-6 CMOS Pixel Missing Compensation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21 5-4 AF Section Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24 5-4-1 VCM Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 25 5-4-2 CZ Automatic Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26 5-4-3 Cam Correction (AUTO) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26 5-5 IS Section Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 27 5-5-1 Hall Element Offset Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 28 5-5-2 Hall Element Gain Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 30 5-5-3 Hall Element Offset Readjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 32 5-5-4 GYRO GAIN Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 33 5-5-5 Automatic Intake of Gyro Output Data ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 33 5-5-6 Flash Writing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 33
5-6 AF Sensor Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34 5-6-1 FPN Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 35 5-6-2 Shading Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 36 5-6-3 Linearity Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 37 5-6-4 Linearity Confirmation ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 39 5-7 Recorder Section Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 40 5-7-1 SWP Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 40 5-7-2 C. FG Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 40 5-7-3 Automatic Adjustment of Reel FG ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 40 5-7-4 Flash Writing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 41 5-8 Tape Path Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 42 5-9 Confirmation Items in Parts Replacement ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 43 5-9-1 HDV Joint Record ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 43 5-9-2 FF/REW Search ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 43 5-9-3 Checking the Playback Error rate ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 43 5-9-4 HDV (MPEG-2 TS) Input / Output --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 44 5-9-5 Linearity Confirmation ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 45 5-9-6 Parallax Confirmation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 46 5-10 Checkup when pointed out by the user -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 48 5-10-1 Parallax Confirmation ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 48 IS adjustment chart -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 50 Parallax confirmation chart ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 51
HV20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT
1. Maintenance Tools
1-1 List of Maintenance Tools
Item Name Alignment T ape, (Color bar master/PAL) Alignment T ape (tracking) Cassette T orque Gauge for DV DV Cleaning T ape (hard) Driver bit for tape path adjustment Color bar chart Color Viewer 5600 K for 220V Color Viewer 5600 K for 240V Lamp for Color Viewer 5600K Filter, CCA W1246mm Cassette for changeover to service mode Extension Flexible cable (20pin) CHART , AF SENSOR LINEARIT Y Extension connector (20pin) CHART , AF SENSOR LINEARIT Y Item Number Purpose Remarks DMC III DMC III DMC III DMC III
DY9-1381-000 Recorder electrical adjustment DY9-1379-000 Running adjustment DY9-1346-000 Running adjustment DY9-1384-000 Head cleaning DY9-2053-000 T ape path adjustment DY9-2002-000 Camera electrical adjustment DY9-2039-220 Camera electrical adjustment (for 220V) DY9-2039-240 Camera electrical adjustment (for 240V) DY9-2040-000 Replacement DY9-2046-000 Camera electrical adjustment DY9-1386-000 Service mode, electrical adjustment DY9-1387-000 T est pin extended DY9-1421-000 AF sensor electrical adjustment DY9-1426-000 T est pin extended DY9-1427-000 AF sensor electrical adjustment NEW NEW
2. Setting
(1) Adjustments other than DMC-III : Perform adjustments in the product state. (2) Check of Envelope: Carry out at setting A. (3) Tracking, check of tape running system and cleaning of tape running system: Carry out at setting B. (4) P7 adjustment: Carry out at setting C.
2-1 Setting A
Envelope Check)
(1) Detach the Service Cover. (2) Connect the extension connector (DY9-1426-000) and extension flexible cable (DY9-1387-000) to CN2900. (3) Observe the PB-RF waveform output from the extension flexible cable.
Extension flexible cable (DY9-1387-000) Pin No. 19 7,18,21 23 SWP GND PBRF Signal Designation
DY9-1387-000
Fig. 1
2-2 Setting B
(1) Remove the BOTTOM COVER referring to Disassembling. Note : When carrying out tracking adjustment, refer to 5-8 Tape Path Adjustment" (p. 42). In envelope observation, check the PB-RF signal output from the extension flexible cable that has been attached in 2-1 "Setting A".
ADJUSTMENT DRIVER (DY9-2053-000)
BOTTOM COVER
Fig. 2
2-3 Setting C
(1) Remove the BOTTOM COVER, TOP COVER ASS'Y, FRONT COVER UNIT, R-LCD UNIT, CASSETTE COVER ASS'Y, CARD PCB, CVF BATTERY CASE UNIT, CAMER UNIT referring to Disassembling. Note 1 : Please perform an electric discharge of a capacitor before setting. Note 2 : Referring to Fig.3, connect the required cables. Note 3 : Observe the signal in the same manner as that for setting A. Note 4 : For ejection, open and close the MAIN HOLDER ASS'Y. For mode transition, use the wireless remote controller.
MONITOR TV
WIRELESS CONTROLLER
CA-570
MAIN PCB CN102 CARD PCB CN100 CARD PCB CN104
CASSETTE COVER ASS'Y
Fig. 3
3. Service Modes
3-1 Outline
(1) The service mode in this equipment uses the wireless remote controller. (To be used in remote control code 2) * The remote controller furnished with the instrument cannot transfer to the service mode. For this purpose, use the remote controller (ex. WL-D82) furnished with a conventional product. (2) For changeover to the service mode, a dedicated tool (CASSETTE, SERVICE MODE: DY9-1386-000), extension connector (DY9-1426-000), and an extension flexible cable (DY9-1387-000) are required in addition to the wireless remote controller. (3) Mode changeover is available between the service mode and the normal mode using the Audio dubbing and SLOW keys of the wireless remote controller. As long as power is ON, the service mode is available even if the CASSETTE, SERVICE MODE is removed. (4) In the service mode, changeover of the main unit operation mode can be done using the keys on the main unit and the remote control mode 1. (5) In the service mode, safety functions such as for mechanical error detection, DEW detection and low voltage detection are canceled. (6) In the service mode, the LCD mirror function is canceled.
3-2 How to Change Over to Service Mode

(1) Referring to Fig.1, connect the extension connector and extension flexible cable,set the cassette for changeover to service mode (DY9-1386-000) in the equipment and load the data. (2) Press the Dubbing key on a wireless remote controller that is set at Remote controller code 2. * To change over to Remote controller code 2, press Remote controller setting and Zoom T keys simultaneously for 2 sec. * The remote controller code setting on the DVC main unit is operable both at remote controller codes 1 and 2. (3) Now the changeover to the service mode has been completed and the SERVICE MODE appears on the screen. Fig. 4
DY9-1386-000
* Pressing the SLOW key performs the changeover to the normal mode from the service mode. As long as the power supply is ON, the service mode is available by setting the Audio dubbing key even if the cassette for transfer to service mode is removed. * After the completion of repairs, press the Reset button to release the service mode completely.
Fig. 5
3-3 How to Operate the Wireless Remote Controller in Service Mode

(1) To use the wireless remote controller in the service mode, set it at Remote controller code 2. * To change over to Remote controller code 2, press the Remote controller setting and Zoom T keys simultaneously for 2 sec. * The remote controller furnished with the instrument cannot transfer to the service mode. For this purpose, use the remote controller (ex. WL-D82) furnished with a conventional product.
3. START/STOP 5. SEARCH
4. SEARCH + 11. PLAY 8. FF 6. FRAME +
10. SEARCH SELECT
9. REW 12. STOP 7. FRAME

WL-D82
Remote Controller Code 2 setting
14. 2 2. SLOW
1. DUBBING
13. PAUSE
Fig. 6
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Key Designation (in Normal Mode) DUBBING SLOW START/STOP SEARCH + SEARCH FRAME + FRAME FF REW SEARCH SELECT PLAY STOP PAUSE 2
Key Designation (in Service Mode) SERVICE MODE NORMAL MODE CS+ FUNCTION + FUNCTION HIGH ADDRESS + HIGH ADDRESS ADDRESS + ADDRESS MODE SELECT DATA + DATA STORE EJECT
Function Change over to service mode Change over to normal mode Increases CS by 1. Increases FUNCTION by 1. Decreases FUNCTION by 1. Increases HIGH ADDRESS by 1. Decreases HIGH ADDRESS by 1. Increases ADDRESS by 1. Decreases ADDRESS by 1. Change over to RD/WR mode Increases DATA by 1. Decreases DATA by 1. Defines/w rites DATA. Performs EJECT.
3-4 Indications in Service Mode

Shown below are the indications in the service mode.
1 2 3 7
18
10 11 12 13 14 15
19
16
Fig. 7 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Indicates that the service mode is currently selected. (SERV) MODE : Indicates the MODE currently selected. (RD/WR/ST)
17
Indicates for which block the command is specified. (MA,MD, CA, CD, etc.) CS : Indicates the Chip Select currently specified. (0~7) Function : Indicates the Function currently selected. (00~FF) ADDR : Indicates the ADDRESS currently selected. (0000~FFFF) DT : Indicates, in hexadecimal representation, the DATA currently being read or set. (00~FF) Indicates the mechanical status. (POPUP, STBY, LOAD1, LOAD2, STOP, PLAY)
9. Indicates the absolute track No. 10. Indicates the mechanical error. (Main power supply backup) 11. Indicates mechanical error history (LITHIUM 3V battery backup) 12. Indicates the version of the MAIN program in the FR MI-COM. 13. Indicates the version of the CCM MI-COM. 14. Indicates the version of the CAMERA program in the flash memory mounted outside the CCM MI-COM. 15. Indicates the version of the CARD program in the flash memory mounted outside the CCM MI-COM. 16. E0 : Indicates the error rate of the track that is traced in the CH0 (Low ch) head. 17. E1 : Indicates the error rate of the track that is traced in the CH1 (High ch) head. 18. Data Write status (00: READ mode, 04 : Write preparation, OC : Write execution) 19. ST : Adjustment status (02: During adjustment, 05: OK in adjustment result, 09: NG in adjustment result)* * The numeric value indicated varies depending on the adjustment item concerned.
4. Description of Service Modes

4-1 SD Specification Error Rate
<Outline>
(1) The error rate specification differs between SD specification and HD specification.
SD Specification Error Rate

(1) VIDEO error rate (VIDEO + AUDIO) and AUDIO error rate can be checked. (2) Note that the error rate is worsened due to failure in tape running, tape deterioration, decreases in head output, failures the in head amplifier circuit, improper drum shield, etc.
Low ch.
EO 2 5 E1
High ch.
<How to read the VIDEO + AUDIO error rate>

An average error rate on 64-track AUDIO+VIDEO sector is indicated in exponential representation. Example) 25 is indicated: Error rate = 2 10 -5
2 10
Fig. 8
-5
Important After checking, set the DT to the product setting. Press the STORE key at (STEP 1 -PROCEDURE 1). <Indications in VIDEO + AUDIO error rate>
ST EP 1 PROCEDURE CS 1) Set as shown right. 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) 0 Function 10 MONIT OR ADDR MODE 00B4 ST RD DT 00 01 Video + Audio error rate indication Microcomputer operation
<How to read the AUDIO error rate>

To read the error rate of an AUDIO tracks, follow the procedures in the table below. The number of erroneous sync blocks out of 64-track AUDIO sync blocks is indicated in two hexadecimal digits. (FF limitation is imposed on values exceeding 255.) Example) 23is indicated: Number of erroneous sync blocks = 35 In the product specifications, the error rate on both channels in self-recording LP playback is as follows : Error rate =28H or less (Number of erroneous sync blocks = 40 or less)
Low ch.
AO 2 3 A1
High ch.
2 3
(hexadecimal)
( 2 1 6 ) + 3 = 3 5(decimal)
Fig. 9
Important After checking, set the DT to the product setting. Press the STORE key at (STEP 1 -PROCEDURE 1). <Change to an AUDIO error rate>
ST EP 1 PROCEDURE CS 1) Set as shown right. 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) 0 Function 10 MONIT OR ADDR MODE 001D ST RD DT 00 03 Product setting 03 Audio error rate indication Microcomputer operation
Remarks) Restoring DT back to "00"makes a return to Audio + Video error rate.
4-2 HD Specification Error Rate

<Outline>
(1) A VIDEO error rate (VIDEO + AUDIO) can be checked. (2) Note that the error rate is worsened due to failure in tape running, deterioration of tape, decreased in head output, failure in head amplifier, improper drum shield, etc. Note) The error rate for AUDIO only cannot be indicated.
<How to read the VIDEO + AUDIO error rate>

An average error rate on 64-track AUDIO+VIDEO sector is indicated in exponential representation. Example) 25 is indicated: Error rate = 2 10 -5
Low ch.
EO 2 5 E1
High ch.
2 10
Fig. 10
-5
Important After checking, set the DT to the product setting. Press the STORE key at (STEP 1 -PROCEDURE 1). <Indications in VIDEO + AUDIO error rate>
ST EP 1 PROCEDURE CS 1) Set as shown right. 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) 0 Function 10 MONIT OR ADDR MODE 00B4 ST RD DT 00 01 Video + Audio error rate indication Microcomputer operation
4-3 Mechanical Error Indication

<Outline>
On occurrence of a mechanical error, the conditions of the error can be checked in the service mode and shortcut mode. Two types of indications are made: the current error data indication, and the error history data indication backed up by LITHIUM 3V. * In the shortcut mode, the conditions of each error can be checked without using the service cassette.
Relevant errors are highlighted in purple.
E : TAPE END B : TAPE TOP D : DRUM ERROR C : CAPSTAN ERROR S : S-REEL ERROR T : T- REEL ERROR L : LOADING MTR ERROR D : DEW ERROR
Fig. 11
4-3-1 Indications in Service Mode

The data backed up by the LITHIUM 3V can be reset by the STEP-1 operation shown below.
ST EP 1 PROCEDURE CS 1) Make setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) 0 Function 08 MONIT OR ADDR MODE 0008 ST RD DT 00 Reset completion of backup data. Microcomputer operation
4-3-2 Indications in Shortcut Mode <Display Procedure>

(1) Turn power off. (2) Reverse the LCD panel to close it. (3) While holding down the Photo button and the START/STOP button, turn power on in the card playback mode.
Indications are provided in two hexadecimal digits. Through conversion to eight binary digits, the conditions of each error can be checked as shown below. High bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 Low Present error data. Error history data backed up by LITHIUM 3 V battery. : TAPE END (E) : TAPE TOP (B) : DRUM ERROR (D) : CAPSTAN ERROR (C) : S-REEL ERROR (S) : T- REEL ERROR (T) : LOADING MOTOR ERROR (L) : DEW ERROR (D)
Fig. 12
10
4-4 Cleaning Mode

On this product, setting cleaning tape automatically transfers to (and allows to exit from) the cleaning mode. Note : Do not set hard type cleaning tape at FULL BOT status, lest the head wear excessively.
4-5 Commands Particular to Camera

<Outline>
(1) The commands particular to camera are provided for checking the operation. (2) Make preparations according to the table below and carry out the desired commands particular to the camera. (3) To restore any setting back to the original status, press the PAUSE key (STORE) for each item again in the ST mode. Turning the power OFF/ON resets all the settings.
ST EP PROCEDURE CAM SPECIAL COMMAND WB SET 1) Make setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) WB 1) Make setting shown at right. LOCK 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) WB 1) Make setting shown at right. T URBO 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) WB 1) Make setting shown at right. OUT DOOR 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) WB 1) Make setting shown at right. INDOOR 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) IRIS 1) Make setting shown at right. OPEN 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) IRIS 1) Make setting shown at right. CLOSE 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) AGC 1) Make setting shown at right. MAX 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) AGC 1) Make setting shown at right. MIN 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) COLOR 1) Make setting shown at right. BAR 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) White 1) Make setting shown at right. 100% 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) White 1) Make setting shown at right. 50% 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) BLACK & 1) Make setting shown at right. WHIT E 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) GRAY 1) Make setting shown at right. SCALE 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) WHIT E 1) Make setting shown at right. LED ON 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) CS 2 Function 08 MONIT OR ADDR MODE 3300 ST RD 3301 ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD Microcomputer operation DT -------------------------------
WB is set.
08
WB is locked.
08
3302
WB high-speed setting mode
08
3303
WB outdoor mode
08
3304
WB indoor mode
08
3305
T he iris is opened forcibly.
08
3306
T he iris is closed forcibly.
08
3309
A value of AGC gain is maximized.
08
330A
A value of AGC gain is minimized.
08
330B
Outputs color bar from DIGIC DV.
08
330C
Outputs white 100% from DIGIC DV.
08
330D
Outputs white 50% from DIGIC DV. Outputs white & black chart from DIGIC DV.
08
330F
08
3310
Outputs gray scale from DIGIC DV. Forces the white LED to light.
08
331F
11
4-6 Checking the Lens Resetting

<Outline>
(1) Set up addresses according to the table shown below. Thus, using data marked with the arrows in the figure below, you can check whether lens resetting has been completed or not. * In case of 40 or 44, the zoom lens has not yet been reset. * In case of 80 or 84, the focus lens has not yet been reset. * In case of D4, the resetting of the zoom lens and focus lens has been completed.
ST EP 1 PROCEDURE CS 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 Function 08 MONIT OR ADDR MODE 312E RD DT -RAM data indicat ion Microcomputer operation
Fig. 13
12
4-7 Functional Check of Control Keys and Switches

<Outline>
(1) The MODE, FR terminals can be checked in the service mode. With this function, the key-related operations and the connections between the keys and the MI-COM terminals can be checked in the product state. (2) Perform the check in the RD mode.
4-7-1 MODE MI-COM Input Port

PIN P6 U3 J4 J3 NAME M F CW SW M F CCW SW SCN POW SW CARD DET M F Dial M F Dial M ODE SELECT SW detection M emory card loading detection Halfway pressing of Photo SW Full pressing of Photo SW Start / Stop SW Barrier closing SW Barrier opening SW POWER SW detection Cassette IN SW detection EJECT SW detection POWER SW detection Tape / Card SW DC JACK detection M ODE SELECT SW detection Description CS Function ADDR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 000B 000B 0019 0019 000E 0011 000E 000A 000A 0014 0014 0014 0014 0014 0014 0019 DATA Description BIT 6 "L" when ON 7 5 4 5 5 4 3 1 1 5 4 2 3 7 0 "L" when ON "L" when ON "L" for memory card loading "L" when ON "L" when ON "L" when ON "L" at detection "L" at detection "L" when ON "L" when ON "L" when ON "L" when ON "H" when Tape "H" for memory card loading "L" when ON
N1 HALF PHOTO SW U11 PHOTO SW P1 P3 START/STOP SW BARRSW 1
R2 BARRSW 2 E16 CAM POW SW E14 CAS IN B12 EJECT SW D16 VTR POW SW C16 T/C POW SW G13 DC J DET K1 P POW SW
4-7-2 MODE MI-COM A/D Port
PIN B8 A6 C5 B5 A5 C4 C7 A7
NAME KEY AD4 KEY AD3 KEY AD2 KEY AD1 KEY AD0 ZOOM AD BATT TEM P BATT A/D
Description Switch Detection Switch Detection Switch Detection Switch Detection Switch Detection ZOOM KEY output Battery Temperature Detection Battery Voltage Detection
CS Function ADDR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 0005 000B 0009 0008 0015 0002 0000
AD DATA (00~FF) FF/+(84) PLAY/PAUSE/STROBE(3F) STOP/INDEX/DRIVE M ODE(00) F.ASSIST(84) FOCUS(3F) REW(00) DISP/LCD(00) FUNC(00) WIDE (FF) Low (FF) Low (00)
000A DIRECTPRINT SW(3F) Cross top(84) Cross under(3F) SET(84) TELE (00) High (00) High (FF) CENTER
Cross left(3F) Cross right(00)
13
4-7-3 FR MI-COM Input Port

PIN NAME Description Tape recording prohibition Panel open SW Panel reverse SW AV mini JACK detection External M IC detection CS Function ADDR 0 0 0 0 0 01 01 01 01 01 000A 000A 0003 0004 000A DATA Description BIT 7 "L" at detection 4 "H" when open 6 0 3 "L" when reversing "L" at detection "L" at detection
F15 REC PROOF AC3 PANEL OPEN SW AE5 PANEL BT SW B11 AV JACK DET V1 EXT DET
4-7-4 FR MI-COM A/D Port

PIN NAME Description DEW detection IRIS encorder ND encorder CS Function ADDR 0 0 0 02 02 02 0004 0005 0006 AD DATA (00~FF) Low Low (00) Low (00) Small diap hragm High High (FF) High (FF) Open
H23 DEW AD K27 I ENC H22 ND ENC
14
5. Adjustment Procedures
5-1 Adjustment Items in Part Replacement
After replacement of major parts, perform adjustments referring to the table shown below. Note that the following table shows the minimum required adjustments to be performed after replacing any major part. If two or more parts have been replaced or any faulty condition has occurred, make required adjustments accordingly.
NOTE)
(1) Before turning on power to the main unit, prepare the tools necessary for a series of adjustment steps and make settings as required. Thus, you can perform the adjustment items in succession without having to make preparations before each adjustment item. (2) After turning on power to the main unit, make adjustments in the order indicated in the Service Manual. Make adjustments successively wherever possible.
Adjustment Items in Parts Replacement

Camera system Part name No. Adjustment item Lens 5-2 CMOS Section 5-2-1 5-2-2 Iris Adjustment FPG Compensation AUDIO CMOS MAIN FOCUS SENSOR PCB ASS'Y ASS'Y CVF PCB ASS'Y
: Adjustment required
Adjustment setting
Product state Product state
5-3 Camera Section 5-3-1 5-3-2 5-3-3 5-3-4 5-3-5 5-3-6 WB Adjustment (1) Color Balance Adjustment WB Adjustment (2) WB Adjustment (3) Flash Memory Writing CMOS Missing Pixel Compensation Product state Product state Product state Product state Product state Product state
5-4 AF Section 5-4-1 5-4-2 5-4-3 VCM Adjustment CZ Automatic Adjustment Cam Correction (AUT O) Product state Product state Product state
5-5 IS Section 5-5-1 5-5-2 5-5-3 5-5-4 5-5-5 5-5-6 Hall Element Offset Adjustment Hall Element Gain Adjustment Hall Element Offset Readjustment GYRO GAIN Adjustment Automatic Intake of Gyro Output Data Flash Writing Product state Product state Product state Product state Product state Product state
5-6 AF Sensor 5-6-1 5-6-2 5-6-3 5-6-4 FPN Adjustment Shading Adjustment Linearity Adjustment Linearity Confirmation Product state Product state Product state Product state
15

: Adjustment required Recorder system Part name No. Adjustment item MAIN DMC III PCB Adjustment setting
5-7 Recorder Section 5-7-1 5-7-2 5-7-3 5-7-4 DMC III 5-8 T ape Path Adjustment T ape Path Adjustment setting SWP Adjustment C. FG Adjustment Automatic Adjustment of Reel FG Flash Writing Product state
(or Recorder adjustment setting)
Product state
Product state
Product state
Confirmation Items in Parts Replacement

Part name No. Adjustment item MAIN PCB AUDIO FOCUS ASS'Y CMOS LENS SENSOR DMC III ASS'Y
: Adjustment required
Adjustment setting
5-9 Confirmation Items in Parts Replacement 5-9-1 5-9-2 5-9-3 5-9-4 5-9-5 5-9-6 HDV Joint Record FF/REW Search Checking the Playback Error rate HDV (MPEG-2 T S) Input / Output Linearity Confirmation Parallax Confirmation Product state Product state Product state Product state Product state Product state
5-10 Checkup when pointed out by the user 5-10-1 Parallax Confirmation Product state
Note) T he Main circuit board for service is factory adjusted. T hus only upon a request from the customer, perform check and/or adjustment.
16
5-2 CMOS Section Adjustment

5-2-1 Iris Adjustment Preparation)
(1) Make adjustments to the IRIS section in the product state. (2) Adjustment Conditions. Tape/Card Camera/VTR Record mode AE AF ZOOM : Tape : Camera : HDV : P mode : OFF : Wide-angle end
Digital Zoom : OFF Vibration absorption : OFF WB CHART SPEC. Not required Automatic adjustment : Auto
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out IRIS adjustment.
ST EP PROCEDURE IRIS 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 2 08 ST 3000 00 RD 2 08 ST RD 3001 00 Microcomputer operation Iris adjustment. Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05 (Other NG) Writing of iris adjustment data Completion with ST :05 (Other NG)
IRIS 1
IRIS 2
ST
Fig. 14
ST
17
5-2-2 FPG Compensation Note)

Take care that there is no dust on the Light Box, no surrounding objects mirrored on the main body of product lens, no incident light from the surroundings. If all of these conditions are not met, satisfactory performance cannot be obtained.
Preparation)
(1) Make adjustments to the FPG section in the product state. (2) Adjustment Conditions. Tape/Card : Tape Camera/VTR Record mode AE ZOOM AF Digital Zoom : Camera : HDV : P mode : Wide-angle end : Closest MF : OFF
Vibration absorption : OFF WB : Auto CHART SPEC. LIGHT BOX (5600K) Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out FPG adjustment.
ST EP PROCEDURE FPG 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 2 08 ST 3017 00 RD 2 08 ST RD 3014 00 Microcomputer operation FPG compensation Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05 (Other NG) Writing of FPG compensasion data Completion with ST :05 (Other NG)
ST
Fig. 15
ST
18
5-3 Camera Section Adjustment

Note)
(1) Be sure to consecutively perform each adjustment of WB in section 5-3-1 to 5-3-4 in order shortly after turning on the power of the MAIN UNIT. (In principle, perform them within 10 minutes after power-on.) Independent adjustment is insufficient to obtain enough performance. (2) Each adjustment of WB in section 5-3-1to 5-3-4 is enabled by carrying out Flash memory writing in section 5-3-5. When turning off/ on the power during adjustment, be sure to perform 5-3-5: Flash memory writing beforehand.
Preparation)
(1) Make adjustments to the Camera section in the product state. (2) Adjustment Conditions. Tape/Card Camera/VTR Record mode AE AF ZOOM : Tape : Camera : HDV : P mode : OFF : Wide-angle end (An angle of view to completely come out to right and left edge of a chart)
Digital Zoom : OFF Vibration absorption : OFF WB : Auto
5-3-1 WB Adjustment (1)

CHART SPEC. Light box (5600K) Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, perform WB (1) adjustment.
ST EP PROCEDURE WB (1) 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 4 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 5 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 2 10 ST 1044 00 RD 2 10 ST RD ST RD ST RD 1045 00 Microcomputer operation T arget value reset. Adjustment is completed. T arget value reset. Adjustment is completed. T arget value reset. Adjustment is completed. T arget value reset. Adjustment is completed.
10
1046
00
10
1047
00
08
ST 3002 WR RD
--Adjustment is in progress. Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05 (Other NG)
19
5-3-2 Color Balance Adjustment

CHART SPEC. Lightbox (5600K), and color bar chart Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, perform color balance automatic adjustment.
ST EP PROCEDURE COLOR BALANCE 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 2 08 ST 3003 -WR RD Microcomputer operation
Adjustment is in progress. Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05 (Other NG)

CHART SPEC. Light box (5600K), and CCA12 filter Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
ST EP PROCEDURE WB (2) 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 2 08 ST 3004 -WR RD Microcomputer operation

CHART SPEC. Light box (5600K) Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
ST EP PROCEDURE WB (3) 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 2 08 ST 3005 -WR RD Microcomputer operation
5-3-5 Flash Memory Writing

SPEC. Data writing
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, perform flash writing.
ST EP PROCEDURE FLASH WRIT ING 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 2 08 ST 3006 -WR RD Microcomputer operation
Writing of adjustment data. Completion with ST :05 (Other NG)
20
5-3-6 CMOS Missing Pixel Compensation Note)

(1) In this camcorder, it is also possible to make compensation for black dots. (2) Up to 300 white dots and up to 212 black dots can be corrected. If more than the above number are detected in adjustment, the result of adjustment is indicated as NG and the correction is not performed. Further, if three consecutive missing pixels in a row are detected, the correction is not performed either. (3) The number of white dot increases with the temperature of the CMOS, causing a change in detectable level. If the adjustment is performed after a lapse of time longer than the specified period of power-on, the temperature of the CMOS becomes higher than a preset temperature level to result in an increase in the number of white dots detected. In this situation, CMOS Missing Pixel Compensation cannot be made properly. (4) In addition to the CMOS Missing Pixel Compensation function mentioned above, this product is provided with a function for automatically correcting missing pixel points each time power is turned on and a function for automatically correcting missing pixel points at the time of shooting at a dark object (interlinked with AGC level adjustment). CHART SPEC. Light box (5600K) Automatic writing
Preparation)
(1) Carry out compensation for CMOS missing pixel in the product state. (2) Adjustment conditions Tape/Card : Tape Camera/VTR Record mode AE AF ZOOM Digital Zoom : Camera : HDV : P mode : Closest MF : Telephoto-end : OFF
Vibration absorption : OFF
Procedure)
(1) According to the table shown below, carry out CMOS Missing Pixel Compensation. (Perform this step about 30 minutes after power-on.) (2) If the result of adjustment is NG (status 09), refer to the error code table shown below. Furthermore, by observing an actual image, check for stuck/void pixels. Then, judge whether the result of adjustment is OK or NG. (In the case of NG, replace the CMOS SENSOR Assy with a new one.)
ST EP PROCEDURE 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 2 08 ST 300E -RD 2 08 ST RD 300F -Microcomputer operation Blemish detected Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09 Blemish detection data writing Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09
21
White dots
Black dots
Fig. 16
Confirmation of total number of dots

(1) Referring to the table below, check the number of white dots and black dots detected, respectively.
ST EP PROCEDURE FPG 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 2 06 ST 001A -RD Microcomputer operation
Display of total number of white dots and black dots
STATUS code
Error code (bit)
Fig. 17
22
Error Code Table for CMOS Missing Pixel Compensation

Error No 00 01 02 04 Error Conditions Normal end (Less than 212 black dots, Less than 300 white dots) T he number of black dots has exceeded the upper limit in the first time of detection (212 points or more detected). T he number of black dots has exceeded the upper limit in the second time of detection (212 points or more detected). T he total number of black dots in the first time and second time of detection has exceeded the upper limit (212 points or more detected). In black dot detection, a maladjustment of AE has been found. T he number of white dots has exceeded the upper limit in the first time of detection (300 points or more detected). T he number of white dots has exceeded the upper limit in the second time of detection (300 points or more detected). T he total number of white dots in the first time and second time of detection has exceeded the upper limit (300 points or more detected). In white/black dot detection, three consecutive missing pixels in a row are detected.
08 10 20 40
80
23
5-4 AF Section Adjustment

Note)
(1) Perform 5-4-2: CZ automatic adjustment shortly after turning on the power (within 5 minutes in principle). (2) The sections 5-4-2 : CZ automatic adjustment and 5-4-3 : Cam correction (AUTO) must be executed consecutively. If they are performed independently, sufficient performance cannot be obtained. Also, when section 5-4-2 : CZ automatic adjustment is completed, execute section 5-4-3 : Cam correction (AUTO) must be executed immediately without delay. If section 5-4-3 : Cam correction (AUTO) is executed after time has passed since completion of section 5-4-2 : CZ automatic adjustment, sufficient performance cannot be obtained. (3) When it is required to make the CZ automatic adjustment shortly, do it after performing the IRIS adjustment of the CMOS section and the FPG adjustment in section 5-2-1 to 5-2-2 and 5-5-1: Hole element offset adjustment of the IS section.
Preparation)
(1) Make adjustments to the AF section in the product state. (2) CZ adjustment and cam correction conditions (initial state) Tape/Card : Tape Shooting mode ZOOM : Program AE : Telephoto-end
CZ adjustment chart : 2.4 0.02 m from lens front Chart luminance : 500 lux or more (High illuminance should be avoided at the wide-angle end.) Digital Zoom Auto slow shutter : OFF : OFF
24
5-4-1 VCM Adjustment

SPEC. Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out VCM adjustment.
ST EP PROCEDURE Preparation for VCM adjustment 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 2 08 ST 3119 00 RD 2 08 ST 311A RD ST RD 0081 -AA 00 Operation of flash update of FR microcomputer. Microcomputer operation
It will take about ten seconds OK with ST : 19 Correction value calculation. OK with ST : AA, NG with ST : FE
08
ST Fig. 18
25
5-4-2 CZ Automatic Adjustment

CHART SPEC. CZ adjustment chart At STEP 3, ST : AA should be attained.
Procedure)
(1) In the telephoto-end setting, bring the center of chart image to the center of monitor TV. (2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out CZ automatic adjustment in the service mode. (3) Perform the cam correction.
ST EP PROCEDURE CZ 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 2 08 ST 3110 00 RD 10 2 08 ST 3100 -Automatic adjustment is started. T hen, it is completed in approximately 30 seconds. If any NG condition is encountered in automatic adjustment, check the parts inside the lens section. Adjustment is completed (ST =AA : OK). Perform the cam correction. Adjustment is completed (ST =FF : NG). T urn the power off and then back on. T hen make readjustment. Microcomputer operation
Move to adjustment mode.
Judgement on result of adjustment
08
RD RD
3100
AA FF
5-4-3 Cam Correction (AUTO)

CHART SPEC. CZ adjustment chart Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) Confirm that a zoom position is a telephoto end. After focus movement is stopped, perform the cam correction by following the table below. (2) Quit the service mode, turn power off/on, and then check that proper focusing can be attained in normal zooming operation (AF OFF). (3) If the result is NG, perform 5-4-2 : CZ automatic adjustment and 5-4-3 : Cam correction (AUTO).
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR CAM CORRECT ION CS Function MD ADDR DT 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3101 00 2) Perform storing. RD 01 (press the PAUSE button.) 2 Confirm that the center of a chart is matched with the center of a monitor. 3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3102 00 WR 2) Perform storing. RD 02 (press the PAUSE button.) 4 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3104 00 2) Perform storing. RD 04 (press the PAUSE button.) 5 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3105 00 2) Perform storing. RD AA (press the PAUSE button.) Microcomputer operation
Correction value measurement. Completion with ST :02. Correction value calculation. Completion with ST :04. Completion of correction value writing. Completion with ST :AA.
26
5-5 IS Section Adjustment

Note)
(1) When it is required to make 5-5-4: gyro gain adjustment independently, do it after performing 5-4-2: CZ automatic adjustment. (2) Each adjustment is enabled by carrying out Flash memory writing. Before turning off/on the power during adjustment, be sure to make Flash memory writing.
Preparation)
(1) Make IS adjustments in the product state. (2) Make adjustment on a tripod or a stable desk. (3) Adjustment conditions Program AE : Auto mode IS adjustment chart : 2.4 0.02m from lens front (Prepare the IS adjustment chart by copying it from P.50 of this manual and using it for adjustment.) (4) For adjustment, set the DEMO MODE menu item to OFF beforehand.
<Preparation for IS adjustment>
2.4m0.02m IS CHART
SETTING
Fig. 19
27
5-5-1 Hall Element Offset Adjustment

CHART SPEC. IS adjustment chart (attached with this manual) Align the shift lens amplitude center with center
Procedure)
(1) Fasten the camera and align the chart center with the monitor center (field angle is arbitrary). (2) According to the following table, move the chart respectively. At ADDR : 3204/3205, adjust the chart center to the shift center.
ST EP PROCEDURE IS OFFSET 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. 3) Make the setting shown at right. 4) Press the ST ORE key. 5) Make the setting shown at right. 6) Press the ST ORE key. 2 Hall element YAW offset adjustment. 2-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key and mark the center of chart on the monitor. 2-2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key and mark the center of chart on the monitor. 2-3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. 2-4 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Change the DT so that the chart center will be at the center of marks put in ST EPS 2-1 and 2-2. 3) Press the ST ORE key. MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 4 50 ST 005C 33 RD ST 005D 00 RD 48 ST 320A 02 RD 4 48 ST RD ST RD ST RD ST 320B 01 Shift Lens moves and chart moves to right of screen. 320B 02 Shift Lens moves and chart moves to left of screen. 320B 3204 00 Shift Lens returns to initial position. ADJ "ADJ" Microcomputer operation
Ends the Hall element offset adjustment setting.
48
4 4
48 48
RD
(Continued to next page.)
28
HV20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT (Continued from the previous page)

ST EP PROCEDURE IS OFFSET 3 Hall element PIT CH offset adjustment 3-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key and mark the center of chart on the monitor. 3-2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key and mark the center of chart on the monitor. 3-3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. 3-4 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Change the DT so that the chart center will be at the center of marks put in ST EPS 3-1 and 3-2. 3) Press the ST ORE key. MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 4 48 ST RD ST RD ST RD ST 320B 03 Shift Lens moves and chart moves toward top of screen. 320B 04 Shift Lens moves and chart moves toward bottom of screen. 320B 3205 00 Shift Lens returns to initial position. ADJ "ADJ" Microcomputer operation
48
4 4
48 48
RD
4 4-1 5 5-1 5-2
Adjustmen settingt release 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. Flash writing 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key.
48
ST 320A RD ST RD ST RD 320F 0081
00 Completion of adjustment setting release. 00 -00
4 0
48 48
Completion of EEP writing. Completion of Flash writing.
29
5-5-2 Hall Element Gain Adjustment

CHART SPEC. IS adjustment chart (attached with this manual) Adjust the Shift Lens amplitude to the circumference of the chart.
Procedure)
(1) Fasten the camera and align the chart center with the monitor center (field angle is arbitrary). (2) According to the following table, move the chart for aligning the circumference of chart with mark put on the monitor.
MONIT OR ST EP PROCEDURE IS GAIN CS Function MD ADDR DT 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 320A 03 2) Press the ST ORE key. RD 3) Mark the center of chart on the monitor. 2 Hall element YAW gain adjustment 2-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 3206 -2) Change DT so that the marking on the "ADJ" monitor will be aligned with the circle on the chart. 3) Press the ST ORE key. RD 2-2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 3204 -2) If the marking on the monitor deviates "ADJ" from the center of the chart, change DT to attain center alignment. 3) Press the ST ORE key. RD 2-3 1) Carry out steps 2-1 and 2-2 repetitively to eliminate deviation between the chart and marking. 2-4 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 3206 -2) Press the ST ORE key, and then write MD. Check that the marking on the monitor is almost aligned with the circle on the chart. If the result of check is OKd go to step 3. Microcomputer operation
Ends the Hall element gain adjustment setting.
Shift Lens moves, and the chart shifts leftward with respect to the center.
Shift Lens returns to the center position.
Shift Lens moves to shift the chart rightward with respect to the center.
30

MONIT OR ST EP PROCEDURE IS GAIN CS Function MD ADDR DT 3 Hall element PIT CH gain adjustment 3-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 3207 -2) Change DT so that the marking on the "ADJ" monitor will be aligned with the circle on the chart. 3) Press the ST ORE key. RD 3-2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 3205 -2) If the marking on the monitor deviates "ADJ" from the center of the chart, change DT to attain center alignment. 3) Press the ST ORE key. RD 3-3 1) Carry out steps 2-1 and 2-2 repetitively to eliminate deviation between the chart and marking. 3-4 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 3207 -2) Press the ST ORE key, and then write MD. ST Check that the marking on the monitor is almost aligned with the circle on the chart. If it is OK, quit. Microcomputer operation
Shift Lens moves to shift the chart on the monitor downward with respect to the center.
Shift Lens returns to the center position.
Shift Lens moves to shift the chart on the monitor upward with respect to the center.
4 4-1 5 5-1 5-2
Adjustment setting release 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. Flash writing 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key.
48
ST RD ST RD ST RD
320A
00 Completion of adjustment setting release.
4 0
48 08
320F 0081
00 Completion of EEP writing. 00 Completion of Flash writing.
31
5-5-3 Hall Element Offset Readjustment

ST EP PROCEDURE IS OFFSET 1 Hall element YAW offset adjustment. 1-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. 3) Make the setting shown at right. 4) Press the ST ORE key and mark the center of chart on the monitor. 1-2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key and mark the center of chart on the monitor. 1-3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. 1-4 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Change the DT so that the chart center will be at the center of marks put in ST EPS 2-1 and 2-2. 3) Press the ST ORE key. MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 4 48 ST 320A RD ST 320B RD ST RD ST RD ST 320B 02 01 Shift Lens moves and chart moves to right of screen. 02 Shift Lens moves and chart moves to left of screen. 320B 3204 00 Shift Lens returns to initial position. ADJ "ADJ" Microcomputer operation
48
4 4
48 48
RD
2 2-1
2-2
2-3 2-4
Hall element PIT CH offset adjustment 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key and mark the center of chart on the monitor. 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key and mark the center of chart on the monitor. 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Change the DT so that the chart center will be at the center of marks put in ST EPS 3-1 and 3-2. 3) Press the ST ORE key.
48
ST RD ST RD ST RD ST
320B
03 Shift Lens moves and chart moves toward top of screen.
48
320B
04 Shift Lens moves and chart moves toward bottom of screen.
4 4
48 48
320B 3205
00 Shift Lens returns to initial position. ADJ "ADJ"
RD
32

ST EP PROCEDURE IS OFFSET 3 Adjustment setting release 3-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. 4 Flash writing 4-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. 4-2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 4 48 ST 320A RD ST RD ST RD 320F 0081 00 Completion of adjustment setting release. 00 -00 Microcomputer operation
4 0
48 48
5-5-4 GYRO GAIN Adjustment

SPEC. Data Writing
Procedure)
(1) Reset the data to be the original, referring to the table shown below.
ST EP PROCEDURE GYRO GAIN 1 Gyro YAW gain adjustment 1-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 2 Gyro PIT CH gain adjustment 2-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 4 48 ST RD 3200 6C Adjustment is completed. Microcomputer operation
48
ST RD
3201
7D Adjustment is completed.
5-5-5 Automatic Intake of Gyro Output Data

SPEC. Automatic adjusutment
Procedure)
(1) Wait at least 10 seconds while being careful not to apply vibration to the camera. (2) Referring to the table shown below, perform the automatic adjustment.
Note)
It will take approx. 25 seconds at maximum to complete adjustment (OK) after storing (pressing the pause button).
ST EP PROCEDURE GYRO OFFSET 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 4 48 ST 320D 00 RD -Microcomputer operation
Adjustment is completed. Completion with DT :05, NG with ST :09
5-5-6 Flash Writing

ST EP PROCEDURE Flash Writing 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. 2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 4 48 ST 320F 00 RD -0 08 ST 0081 00 RD Microcomputer operation
33
5-6 AF Sensor Adjustment

Preparation)
(1) Make FPN Adjustment and Shading Adjustment in the product state. (2) Adjustment Conditions. Tape/Card Camera/VTR Record mode AE AF ZOOM : Tape : Camera : HDV : P mode : High speed AF : Wide-angle end
Digital Zoom : OFF Vibration absorption : OFF WB : Auto
<AF sensor adjustment preparation> Procedure)

(1) Keep the camera shooting the LIGHT BOX. Note : Place the product near the LIGHT BOX. (2) Display the output waveform from the AF sensor on the LCD panel in the service mode.
ST EP PROCEDURE Output wave form 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 2 08 ST 3150 00 WR RD Microcomputer operation
T he output waveform from he AF sensor is indicated.
Output waveform from the AF sensor (A image)
Output waveform from the AF sensor (B image)
Fig. 20
34
5-6-1 FPN Adjustment <FPN adjustment preparation>
Completely cover the HH AF sensor section with cloth so that light will not enter. HH AF sensor section
Fig. 21
CHART SPEC.
Not required Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) Shield the AF sensor from light so that the output level of the output waveform from the AF sensor is zero. (2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out FPN adjustment.
ST EP PROCEDURE FPN 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 2 08 ST 3151 00 WR RD 52 Microcomputer operation Adjustment is in progress. Adjustment is completed. Writing of adjustment data. Completion with ST :52 (NG : FF)
35
ST
AF sensor output level (zero)
Fig. 22
5-6-2 Shading Adjustment

CHART SPEC. LIGHT BOX (5600K) Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) Place the product in front of the LIGHT BOX. (Place it at a position up to 4cm from the LIGHT BOX.) (2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out shading adjustment.
ST EP PROCEDURE SHADING 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 2 08 ST 3152 00 WR RD 53 Microcomputer operation Adjustment is in progress. Adjustment is completed. Writing of adjustment data. Completion with ST :53 (NG : FF)
ST
AF sensor output level (flat)
Fig. 23
36
5-6-3 Linearity Adjustment Note)

Perform 5-6-3: Linearity adjustment shortly after turning on the power to the MAIN UNIT (within 10 to 15 minutes in principle).
Preparation)
(1) Make Linearity Adjustment in the product state. (2) Adjustment Conditions. Tape/Card Camera/VTR Record mode AE AF : Tape : Camera : HDV : P mode : High speed AF
ZOOM : Standard angle of view Linearity adjustment chart : Make adjustment at each distance from the front surface of the lens shown below. CHART brightness Digital Zoom Vibration absorption WB : EV 11 or more : OFF : OFF : Auto
(3) Tool CHART, AF SENSOR LINEARITY (DY9-1421-000, DY9-1427-000) (DY9-1421-000 consists of the following three as a set. The following chart name is shown at the upper left on the chart.) CHART A 2900mm CHART D 800mm
<Linearity adjustment preparation>
Supplemental Information)
CHART A : 2.9m(7.7cm, +5.8cm) CHART D : 0.8m(0.5cm, +0.5cm)
Distance between the exterior cover and the lens surface : 0.7cm
CHART A 2900mm CHART D 800mm
Fig. 24
CHART SPEC.
CHART, AF SENSOR LINEARITY (DY9-1421-000, DY9-1427-000) Automatic adjustment
37
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out Linearity adjustment.
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation LINEARIT Y CS Function MD ADDR DT AF sensor linearity adjustment 2900mm 1 1-1 Place the Chart A 2900mm at a position 2.9m (-7.7cm, +5.8cm) apart from the front side of lens. Make fine adjustment of the position of the main body so that the waveform output from the AF sensor is as shown in figure 25. 1-2 1-3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3160 00 Adjustment is in progress. 2) Perform storing. WR Adjustment is completed. (press the PAUSE button.) RD 61 Writing of adjustment data. Completion with ST :61 (Other NG : Refer to the error bit table.) 2 AF sensor linearity adjustment 800mm Place the Chart D 800mm at a position 0.8m (-0.5cm, +0.5cm) apart from the front side of lens. 2-1 Make fine adjustment of the position of the main body so that the waveform output from the AF sensor is as shown in figure 25. 2-2 2-3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3162 00 Adjustment is in progress. 2) Perform storing. WR Adjustment is completed. (press the PAUSE button.) RD 63 Writing of adjustment data. Completion with ST :63 (Other NG : Refer to the error bit table.)
C L2
R2 Center of a monitor R2 waveform (A image) C waveform (A image)
L2 waveform (A image)
L2 waveform (B image) C waveform (B image) R2 waveform (B image) Error bit
Properly set the angle of view so that the monitor center is located between the peaks (at the trough) of the output waveform center of the AF sensor. Fig. 25
Error bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
AF Sensor Area Right2 Right1 Center Left1 Left2 0 0 0
38
5-6-4 Linearity Confirmation Preparation)

(1) For Linearity Confirmation, use the product state. (2) Use the same adjustment conditions as those for Linearity adjustment. (3) As to the tools, use the same chart as that for linearity adjustment.
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out Linearity confirmation.
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation LINEARIT Y CONFIRMAT ION CS Function MD ADDR DT 1 AF sensor linearity adjustment 2900mm 1-1 Place the Chart A 2900mm at a position 2.9m (-7.7cm, +5.8cm) apart from the front side of lens. 1-2 Make fine adjustment of the position of the main body so that the waveform output from the AF sensor is as shown in figure 26. 1-3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3150 03 2) Perform storing. RD (press the PAUSE button.) Actual distance is indicated in millimeters. 1-4 Make sure that L1, C and R1 are 2900mm (-254mm, +216mm), respectively. 2 AF sensor linearity adjustment 800mm 2-1 Place the Chart D 800mm at a position 0.8m (-0.5cm, +0.5cm) apart from the front side of lens. 2-2 Make fine adjustment of the position of the main body so that the waveform output from the AF sensor is as shown in figure 26. 2-3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3150 03 2) Perform storing. RD (press the PAUSE button.) Actual distance is indicated in millimeters. 2-4 Make sure that L1, C and R1 are 800mm (-18mm, +17mm), respectively.
L1 L1 waveform (A image)
R1 waveform (A image) R1 Center of a monitor C waveform (A image) L1
R1
DAT:03 L1 waveform (B image) C waveform (B image) R1 waveform (B image) Actual distance of L1 Actual distance of R1 Actual distance of C
Properly set the angle of view so that the monitor center is located between the peaks (at the trough) of the output waveform center of the AF sensor.
Fig. 26
39
5-7 Recorder Section Adjustment

Preparation)
(1) Except for the tape-path adjustment and External Synchronization Frequency Adjustment, perform the adjustment in the product state. (2) Adjustment condition Tape/Card Camera/VTR : Tape : VTR
ASPECT RATIO : HD
5-7-1 SWP Adjustment

MODE SPEC. Playback of color bar master (DY9-1380-000) Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) While playing back the color bar master, perform SWP automatic adjustment referring to the table shown below.
ST EP PROCEDURE SWP (AUT O) 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 0 08 ST 0001 -WR RD Microcomputer operation
Automatic adjustment is in progress. Automatic adjustment is completed.
5-7-2 C. FG Adjustment
MODE SPEC. Playback of color bar master (DY9-1380-000) Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) While playing back the color bar master, perform C.FG automatic adjustment referring to the table shown below.
ST EP PROCEDURE C.FG (AUT O) 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 0 08 ST 0003 -WR RD Microcomputer operation
Automatic adjustment is in progress. Adjustment is completed.
5-7-3 Automatic Adjustment of Reel FG

MODE Stop without VTR cassette
Procedure)
(1) Carry out reel FG adjustment according to the following table.
ST EP PROCEDURE REEL FG (AUT O) 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 0 08 ST 0007 -WR RD Microcomputer operation
Automatic adjustment is in progress. Adjustment is completed.
40
5-7-4 Flash Writing

SPEC. Data writing
Procedure)
(1) Write adjustment data (5-7-1 to 5-7-3) into Flash according the table shown below.
ST EP PROCEDURE EEPROM WRIT ING 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 0 08 ST 0081 00 RD -Microcomputer operation
Completion of Flash writing.
41
5-8 Tape Path Adjustment

Note)
(1) For tape path adjustment, the service mode setting is necessary. For the details of setting procedure, refer to the DMC III section.
Preparation)
(1) For tape path adjustment, perform in the DMC III setting (P. 2, 3).
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table below (STEP 1, 2, 3), play back the tracking master (DY9-1379-000) for tape path adjustment. At STEP 2, perform tracking shift by adjusting DT in a range of F0 to FF so that the RF envelope will be 70%. (2) After adjustment, release tracking shift setting according to the following table (STEP 4 : P.OFF).
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation T RACKING T APE CS Function MD ADDR DT 1 1) Play back the tracking tape. 2 1) Set up tracking shift. 2-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 0 00 ST 9FE7 F2 2) Perform storing. RD (press the PAUSE button.) 3) Perform 70% tracking shift by ST F0~FF T he amount of tracking shift is changed. adjusting DT in a range of F0 to FF. 4) Perform storing. RD (press the PAUSE button.) * T racking shift released in DT 00. 3 1) Perform tape path adjustment with the RF envelope in 70% tracking shift state. 4 1) Select the normal mode. 2) T urn off the power of the main unit.
42
5-9 Confirmation Items in Parts Replacement

5-9-1 HDV Joint Record
Purpose : Since the HDV uses a different connection controlling method from the DV, check is required at the connected section.
Preparation)
(1) Panasonic LP Tape (2) Adjustment Conditions Camera mode (tape), HD mode
Procedure)
(1) Press the START/STOP key and perform Rec Rec pause Rec. (HDV self-recorded tape with connected section is created.) (2) In the VCR/PLAY mode, perform the self-recorded playback of the connected section and check the connected section visually. Criterion for judgement: During playback, the image and time code should be displayed smoothly without fixing at the connected section.
5-9-2 FF/REW Search

Purpose: Since the HDV uses a different search image generation system from the DV, checking is required.
Preparation)
(1) Panasonic LP Tape, Wireless Remote Controller (2) Adjustment Conditions Camera mode (tape), HD mode
Procedure)
(1) Press the SEARCH SELECT key for the HDV self-recorded tape taken in para. 5-9-1 above, and then make search using the and keys.
(2) During Searching, visually check the searched image. Criterion for judgement: During playback, the searched image should be free from distortion and freezing.
5-9-3 Checking the Playback Error rate

Purpose: Since the electric acquisition of HD reproduction signals uses a partially different circuit from the SD, checking is required. SPEC. 2 10 -5 or less
Preparation)
(1) Panasonic LP Tape
Procedure)
(2) During playback of an HDV self-recorded tape, make sure that the playback error rate is within the range of standard value in the service mode.
43
5-9-4 HDV (MPEG-2 TS) Input / Output

Purpose : Since HDV uses a difference signal processing route from DV, checking is required.
Preparation)
(1) Main unit HV20 A for operation check (hereinafter referred to as A), DV cable (4-pin - 4-pin; commercial item) (2) Adjustment Conditions Sending side : Camera mode (tape) Receiving side : VCR/PLAY mode
Procedure)
(1) As shown in Fig.27 below, the HDV input image from A should be able to be displayed on the LCD panel of the equipment B. (2) The HDV output image from the equipment B, which requires checking, should be able to be displayed on the LCD of connected device A. (The combination is opposite to (1) above) Criterion for judgement : When checking the step (1) and (2) described above, there should not be any problem.
Flow of signal of (1) DV Cable (4P-4P)

Fig. 27
44
5-9-5 Linearity Confirmation Note)

Be sure to perform 5-9-5: Linearity confirmation in the product state after replacing any part.
Preparation)
(1) For Linearity Confirmation, use the product state. (2) Use the same adjustment conditions as those for Linearity adjustment. (3) As to the tools, use the same chart as that for linearity adjustment.
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out Linearity confirmation.
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation LINEARIT Y CONFIRMAT ION CS Function MD ADDR DT 1 AF sensor linearity adjustment 2900mm 1-1 Place the Chart A 2900mm at a position 2.9m (-7.7cm, +5.8cm) apart from the front side of lens. 1-2 Make fine adjustment of the position of the main body so that the waveform output from the AF sensor is as shown in figure 28. 1-3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3150 03 2) Perform storing. RD (press the PAUSE button.) Actual distance is indicated in millimeters. 1-4 Make sure that L1, C and R1 are 2900mm (-254mm, +216mm), respectively. 2 AF sensor linearity adjustment 800mm 2-1 Place the Chart D 800mm at a position 0.8m (-0.5cm, +0.5cm) apart from the front side of lens. 2-2 Make fine adjustment of the position of the main body so that the waveform output from the AF sensor is as shown in figure 28. 2-3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3150 03 2) Perform storing. RD (press the PAUSE button.) Actual distance is indicated in millimeters. 2-4 Make sure that L1, C and R1 are 800mm (-18mm, +17mm), respectively.
L1 L1 waveform (A image)
R1 waveform (A image) R1 Center of a monitor C waveform (A image) L1
R1
DAT:03 L1 waveform (B image) C waveform (B image) R1 waveform (B image) Actual distance of L1 Actual distance of R1 Actual distance of C
Properly set the angle of view so that the monitor center is located between the peaks (at the trough) of the output waveform center of the AF sensor.
Fig. 28
45
5-9-6 Parallax Confirmation Note)

Be sure to perform 5-9-6: Parallax comfirmation in the product state after replacing any part.
Preparation)
(1) For Parallax Confirmation, use the product state. (2) Adjustment Conditions. Tape/Card Camera/VTR Record mode AE AF : Tape : Camera : HDV : P mode : Super-quick AF
ZOOM : Telephoto-end Parallax comfirmation chart : 1.0m 0.02m from the front surface of the lens (For the parallax comfirmation chart, print and use the one on p. 51 of this manual. ) CHART brightness : EV 11 or more Digital Zoom Vibration absorption WB : OFF : OFF : Auto
<Parallax confirmation preparation>
Square frame
Telephoto-end 1.0m0.02m
Parallax comfirmation chart
Fig. 29
CHART SPEC.
Parallax comfirmation chart (It is attached in this manual.) Should be within the criteria : X = 11[%]or less, Y = -14 to +10 [%]or less, = 96 [dec.]or less
46
Procedure)
(1) Properly set the angle of view so that the four corners of the square frame on the chart appear equally at the four corners of the monitor. (2) Following the table below, make a check of parallax. (3) Read the values for X, Y, , C and calculate the parallax amount. (hexadecimal system decimal system conversion) (4) Make sure that the criteria are met : X = 11[%]or less, Y = -14 to +10 [%]or less, = below 96 [dec.]or less
ST EP PROCEDURE 1 MONIT OR Microcomputer operation CS Function MD ADDR DT 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3150 00 2) Perform storing. WR (press the PAUSE button.) RD T he output waveform of the AF sensor is indicated. Set the parallax check chart at the position 1.0m (0.02m) from the front surface of the lens. 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3156 00 2) Perform storing. RD (press the PAUSE button.) T he parallax amount is indicated.
Hexadecimal system
Decimal system conversion (The double underlined part shows the calculation expression.)
Calculation of parallax amount (The double underlined part shows the calculation expression.) <How to read> ex) X:14[hex.] Y:FF1F[hex.] :0017[hex.] C:015B[hex.] HEX2DEC(14)=20[dec.] HEX2DEC(FF1F)=65311[dec.] HEX2DEC(0017)=23[dec.] HEX2DEC(015B)=347[dec.] (2018.5)0.94=1.4[%](X Parallax amount) X (6531165536)9.34/347=6.1[%](Y Parallax amount) Y C 23[dec.]( Parallax amount)
Fig. 30
47
5-10 Checkup when pointed out by the user

5-10-1 Parallax Confirmation Note)
Be sure to perform 5-10-1: Parallax comfirmation in the product state after replacing any part.
Preparation)
(1) For Parallax Confirmation, use the product state. (2) Adjustment Conditions. Tape/Card Camera/VTR Record mode AE AF ZOOM : Tape : Camera : HDV : P mode : Super-quick AF : Telephoto-end
Parallax comfirmation chart : 1.0m 0.02m from the front surface of the lens (For the parallax comfirmation chart, print and use the one on p. 51 of this manual. ) CHART brightness Digital Zoom Vibration absorption WB : EV 11 or more : OFF : OFF : Auto
<Parallax confirmation preparation>

Square frame
Telephoto-end 1.0m0.02m
Parallax comfirmation chart
Fig. 31
CHART SPEC.
Parallax comfirmation chart (It is attached in this manual.) Should be within the criteria : X = 11[%]or less, Y = -14 to +10 [%]or less, = 96 [dec.]or less
48
Procedure)
(1) Properly set the angle of view so that the four corners of the square frame on the chart appear equally at the four corners of the monitor. (2) Following the table below, make a check of parallax. (3) Read the values for X, Y, , C and calculate the parallax amount. (hexadecimal system decimal system conversion) (4) Make sure that the criteria are met : X = 11 [%]or less, Y = -14 to +10 [%]or less, = below 96 [dec.]or less
ST EP PROCEDURE 1 MONIT OR Microcomputer operation CS Function MD ADDR DT 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3150 00 2) Perform storing. WR (press the PAUSE button.) RD T he output waveform of the AF sensor is indicated. Set the parallax check chart at the position 1.0m (0.02m) from the front surface of the lens. 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3156 00 2) Perform storing. RD (press the PAUSE button.) T he parallax amount is indicated.
Note)
As to the parallax amount whose values are outside the criteria, replace its parts, check the parallax again, and make sure that the values are within the criteria.
Hexadecimal system
Decimal system conversion (The double underlined part shows the calculation expression.)
Calculation of parallax amount (The double underlined part shows the calculation expression.) <How to read> ex) X:14[hex.] Y:FF1F[hex.] :0017[hex.] C:015B[hex.] HEX2DEC(14)=20[dec.] HEX2DEC(FF1F)=65311[dec.] HEX2DEC(0017)=23[dec.] HEX2DEC(015B)=347[dec.] (2018.5)0.94=1.4[%](X Parallax amount) X (6531165536)9.34/347=6.1[%](Y Parallax amount) Y C 23[dec.]( Parallax amount)
Fig. 32
49
IS adjustment chart
After printing, confirm that diameter of the circle is 36mm.
50
Parallax confirmation chart
SERVICE HINTS
CONTENTS
1. Service Hints -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 1-1 Arrangement of Circuit Boards --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 1-2 Location of Main Elements ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 1-3 Current Consumption Check ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4 2. Trouble Shooting --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5 2-1 Power Supply ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5 2-2 Camera Picture Faulty ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6 2-3 Faulty of Playback Picture -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7 2-4 Warning Displays ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8 3. Memory Card Operation List ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12 3-1 Confirm Method ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 12 3-2 Result Confirmation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12
HV20 E SERVICE HINTS
1. Service Hints
1-1 Arrangement of Circuit Boards
Each PCB is arranged as shown below.
CVF PCB
MAIN PCB
REAR PCB
CARD PCB
CMOS SENSOR ASSY
JACK PCB
LCD PCB
Fig. 1
1-2 Location of Main Elements MAIN PCB
IC1611 IC100 SHIFT LENS IC107 IC1612 CCM MICOM DRIVER IC NOR GATE D/A CONVERTER IC2831 IC2309 IC109 IC1613 DUAL INVERTER IC AND GATE ANALOG SWITCH OPE AMP IC101 FLASH IC2833 PRESET AND CLEAR IC3500 USB IC IC2830 IC104 HDMI IC MOTOR DRIVER IC IC103 IC105 AND GATE NAND GATE IC3300 IC102 IC103 SUB POWER IC EX-OR GATE IC1000 IC1102 MPX4 SDRAM IC3200 IC1100 MAIN POWER IC DIGIC DV II IC1103 SDRAM IC3261 4.6V REGULATOR IC3260 3.2V IC106 REGULATOR EX-OR GATE FU3201 FU3200 FU3203 FU1800 FU3202 FU1900 FU500
IC1200 LENS DRIVER IC108 CHIP SELECT DECODER
IC801 IC2306 IC2303 IC2308 IC2310 IC1501 CVF DRIVER OR GATE 1394IC AND GATE FLASH/SRAM AIF4
IC2307 SDRAM IC3310 5.0V REGULATOR
IC2800 HDV CODEC IC
IC2801 BASEBAND IC IC2802 COMPONENT DRIVER
IC2301 VIC HDV
IC300 MOTOR DRIVER IC
IC2000 VRP2
Fig. 2
SENSOR PCB
IC1041 IC1047 AFE 2.7V REGULATOR
IC1046 CMOS
IC1044 4.2V REGULATOR IC1045 AMP IC1043 5V REGULATOR IC1040 INVERTER IC1042 AFE
LCD PCB
IC902 EEPROM IC903 2.8V REGULATOR IC901 LCD DRIVER
CVF PCB
IC1692 Y SENSOR GYRO
IC1691 P SENSOR GYRO
JACK PCB
IC501 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL
IC502 CMOS IC
Fig. 3
1-3 Current Consumption Check

The following table shows the specified value of current consumption in each status. Measurement condition : Product state, camera auto mode (AF OFF), LCD ON (The current consumption amounts are 0.02A less in each case when CVF is used.) Preset voltage : 7.4V
POWER SW CAMERA
MODE REC PAUSE REC
Current consumption (A) 0.5 0.59 0.35 0.47 0.25(mA)
VCR
STOP PLAY
POWER OFF
2. Trouble Shooting
To detect faulty parts for repair, if any, use the following hints and check points.
2-1 Power Supply

<Hints>
When the power source is attached, the unit enters the standby mode in the following sequences. Main power is connected. UNREG is supplied to the MAIN PCB SUB MI-COM starts up. CCM MI-COM starts up. CCM MI-COM and PWM driver communicate and set the voltage. VCR ON is set to H. PWM driver starts up and turns on each power supply. Establishes communication with the FR MI-COM FR MI-COM initializes recorder mechanical chassis. After initialized, the CCM MI-COM is brought into the standby status with the VCR ON changed to VCR Low. After that, the power supply is turned ON by the following procedures. The power source mode switch is detected with the CCM MI-COM. CCM MI-COM and PWM driver communicate and set the voltage. VCR ON is set to H. PWM driver starts up and turns on each power supply. Establishes communication with the FR MI-COM System startup.
<Check Points>
1) 2) Key Inputs Check the key inputs at Power Switch in the SERVICE mode. Check of microcomputer-to-microcomputer communication If the microcomputer-to-microcomputer communication line is normal, the version number of each microcomputer can be indicated in the service mode. Otherwise, the communication line or microcomputer may be faulty. Error in Mechanism (SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT P. 10) If any errors occur due to mechanical trouble during initialization, those errors will be detected. In this state, the power can be turned on, but the unit enters an ERROR STOP state. In this case, check the error data in 4) SERVICE mode. Fuses on the POWER SUPPLY PCB. Check the continuity of the fuses FU500, 1800, 1900, 3200, 3201, 3202, 3203, and on the MAIN PCB. If no good, replace the fuses and check the power consumption. 5) Replace the MAIN PCB with a service part and check the operation.
3)
2-2 Camera Picture Faulty

<Hints>
The flow of HD camera output is as below. CMOS PCB MAIN PCB (DIGIC DV2 BASEBAND IC 75 DRIVER) COMPONENT TERMINAL, DV TERMINAL The flow of SD camera output is as below. CMOS PCB MAIN PCB (DIGIC DV2 BASEBAND IC VIC HDV) DV TERMINAL, AV TERMINAL For either of them, the image taken by CMOS is processed in DIGIC DV2 and output to the subsequent processing IC.
<Check Points>
1) Lens check If no camera picture appears, check in service mode if the lens has been reset. If NG, check the lens. 2) Confirming blue back output The blue back of the HD signal is created in BASEBAND IC; while that of the SD signal is created in the VIC HDV. If it is confirmed, the signal lines after the BASEBAND IC/VIC HDV are regarded as OK. 3) Confirming card image playback For the card rplayback image, the DIGIC DV2 reads out data from the memory card, performs image processing and outputs the resulting image to the subsequent circuit. If the output is confirmed, the signal lines after the DIGIC DV2 are regarded as OK.
2-3 Faulty of Playback Picture

<Hints>
The track pitch, track length and tape speed are the same for HDV recording and DV recording, however, the method for recording data on a tape for DV recording differs from that of HDV recording. Thus the phenomenon caused by an error that exceeds the capability of the error correction circuit is also different. For SD recording, it normally appears as block noise; while for HDV recording, it appears as a stopped image or blue back display on the screen. Either phenomenon is caused by the occurrence of an error that exceeds the error correction circuit. For HDV recording, since MPEG-2 is employed for image compression and compression between the frames is performed, restoration for each frame is not possible. Thus in the event of an error, a failure occurs for a period of 1GOP = 15 frames = 0.5 seconds. For the reasons shown above, it is recommended to use a tape applicable to HDV recording that prevents errors in HDV recording. Both for HDV recording / SD recording, be sure to judge the reproduced image by its error rate.
<Check Points>
1) 2) Deterioration of Tape Quality Check if flaws, kinks, etc. are found on the magnetic face of the tape or not, and compare it with the error rate of another unit. Error Rate (SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT P. 8, 9) In the service mode, check the error rate of playback. The specified allowable error rate is 2 10-5. If it is no good, proceed as follows. (1) Observe a playback envelope. If it is abnormal, carry out tape-path adjustment. (2) Run a cleaning tape. Use a cleaning tape of hard type (DY9-1384-000).
[Playback time]
After replacement of the drum unit 25 seconds For cleaning 25 seconds per time * Do not play back for 25 seconds or more continuously. * Limit the total playback time to five minutes. * When using hard-type cleaning tape, it is not necessary to select the cleaning mode on the main unit. (3) Check the error rate again. If the error rate is out of the specified range, clean the tape drive parts (posts, drum) using cleaning paper moistened with alcohol. * Take care not to damage the head. * Do not touch the head with bare hands. (4) Check the error rate again. If the error rate is out of the specified range, replace the tape with a new one and check the error rate again. At this step, use a tape which has been purchased at a different time. (For both HDV and SD, use a Panasonic tape applicable to LP, as usual.) The error rate may become worse due to inconsistent quality or aging of the tape. (5) Check the error rate again. If the error rate is out of the specified range, replace the drum unit. (6) Check the error rate again. If the error rate is out of the specified range, replace the mechanical unit.
2-4 Warning Displays
COPYRIGHT PROTECTED DUBBING RESTRICTED

When unable to record to tape due to copy protection information. When trying to record a tape containing copyright protection information or to record an external input image to a card.
COPYRIGHT PROTECTED PLAYBACK IS RESTRICTED

When unable to play tape due to copyright protection information.
SET THE TIME ZONE, DATE AND TIME

When the power has been turned on without setting the time zone and/or date and time.
REMOVE THE CASSETTE

When a cassette is inserted while there is a mechanical error or condensation in the unit.
HEADS DIRTY, USE CLEANING CASSETTE

When the heads are clogged.
CHECK THE HDV/DV INPUT

When HDV or DV is not connected or the device is connected but cannot be recognized.
CHANGE THE BATTERY PACK

When the battery charge level has dropped.
THE TAPE IS SET FOR ERASURE PREVENTION

When REC was pressed in VCR mode when recording is enabled but the cassette was set to write-protection. In Camera mode, when the power is turned ON, when the Start/Stop button is pressed, and when a cassette is inserted.
TAPE END
When the tape end is detected or when a key (such as FF or PLAY) for forwarding the tape in the forward direction is pressed in a mode that allows transition to the forward direction while the tape end being detected.
CARD ERROR
When an error occurred in the card and recording cannot be performed.
CARD FULL
When the available space on the card is low.
NAMING ERROR
When the file number and directory number have reached the maximum.
UNIDENTIFIABLE IMAGE
When you tried to play an unplayable image type, incompatible JPEG-compressed image, or image with corrupted data.
PRINT ORDER ERROR

When there are too many print marks (998 or more), or when a mark file cannot be edited.
NO CARD
When the card is not inserted in the socket of the main unit.
NO IMAGES
When the image that should be played in the card cannot be found.
IN CARD POSITION
When pressing the Start/Stop button in Card camera mode.
PAPER ERROR
When a paper error occurs.
NO PAPER
When the paper has not been inserted into the printer properly or there is no paper in the printer.
PAPER JAM
When a paper jam occurs during printing.
NO INK
When the ink is not installed properly or the ink has run out.
LOW INK LEVEL

When the ink level is low.
INK ABSORBER FULL

When the ink absorber is full.
CANNOT PRINT!
When attempting to print a different type of still image or one recorded by another device, or a still image imported to and edited on a computer.
SET PRINT ORDER
When attempting to print still images not designated for printing by using the Print command in the Card Playback menu.
READJUST TRIMMING
When attempting to change the Paper setting setting after making the trimming settings.
PRINTER ERROR
When a problem occurs in the printer.
COMMUNICATION ERROR
When an error has occurred during communication.
PRINTER IN USE
When the printer is in use. Check the printer status.
PAPER LEVER ERROR

When the printer paper lever is in the improper position.
PRINTER COVER OPEN

When the printer cover is open.
NO PRINT HEAD
When the ink head has not been installed in the printer.
FIRMWARE UPDATED CHECK PRINT SETTINGS

When the printer setting status displays the current recording value and the Easy Direct button was pressed even though this value cannot be used by PictBridge when the printer is connected.
When an attempt has been made to establish a setting which exceeds the number of images (998) which can be set for DPOF transfer.
TOO MANY IMAGES DISCONNECT CABLE

Disconnect the USB cable, delete the still images from the memory card until there are 1800 or less, and then reconnect the USB cable.
CANNOT TRANSFER!
When PC Background is set, and then video is displayed (Setting icon and icon to its right are grayed out, and the PRINT/ SHARE button lights up), and the PRINT/SHARE button is pressed.
AUTO POWER OFF

When automatically setting the power off.
CONDENSATION HAS BEEN DETECTED REMOVE THE CASSETTE

When condensation has formed.
10
INCORRECT TAPE SPECIFICATION CHECK THE CASSETTE [INCORRECT TAPE SPECIFICATION] INPUT SIGNAL NOT SUPPORTED PLAYBACK STD LOCKED PLAYBACK IS RESTRICTED PLAYBACK STD LOCKED INCOMPATIBLE VIDEO INPUT
11
3. Memory Card Operation List

3-1 Confirm Method
(1) Pulling out and insertion of memory card Remove and reinsert the memory card three times, and then confirm that it can be mounted normally. (2) Memory card initialization Initialize the memory card with the camera. (3) Still image shooting Take three or more shots at each image size (LW, L, M, S) and quality (S.Fine, Fine, Normal). Shot consecutive shots with flash at S and S.Fine until the buffer is full. Take shots at an arbitrary size and quality until the "Card is Full" message appears (do S, Normal last). (4) Still image playback Play back several of the images taken, on both individual and index screens, to confirm. (5) Card removal Remove the card and check the images on a PC. Reinsert the card and confirm that it can be mounted normally. (6) Still image playback Confirm that the last image played back is played back correctly. (7) Deletion Run "ERASE ALL IMAGES" and confirm that all still images can be deleted.
3-2 Result Confirmation

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Manufacturer Panasonic Panasonic Panasonic Panasonic Panasonic Panasonic Panasonic Panasonic TOSHIBA TOSHIBA TOSHIBA TOSHIBA TOSHIBA TOSHIBA SanDisk SanDisk SanDisk SanDisk SanDisk SanDisk SanDisk Lexar Lexar Lexar Lexar Lexar Capacity 16MB 32MB 64MB 128MB 256MB 512MB 1GB 2GB 32MB 64MB 128MB 256MB 1GB 2GB 32MB 64MB 128MB 256MB 512MB 1GB 2GB 64MB 128MB 256MB 512MB 1GB Manufacturing years 2005/05 2003/09 2003/08 2004/09 2005/01 2006/01 2006/02 2006/08 2003/06 2003/07 2005/01 2005/01 2006/01 2006/07 2003/06 2003/08 2004/08 2004/06 2005/05 2006/01 2006/04 2005/02 2005/06 2006/03 2006/03 2006/06 Result confirmation
12
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
CONTENTS
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM BLOCK DIAGRAMS CAMERA SECTION-1 CAMERA SECTION-2 CAMERA SECTION-3 SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION SERVO SECTION RECORDER SECTION-1 RECORDER SECTION-2 RECORDER SECTION-3 POWER SUPPLY SECTION CVF SECTION LCD PCB,FOCUS DIAL,LCD FPC ASSY SECTION JACK PCB,FRONT COVER ASSY SECTION CARD,REAR PCB,HDMI FPC ASSY SECTION
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
LENS AF ASS'Y
HALL SENS ZOOM SENS ZOOM MOTOR IC1041 IC1046 IC1044 IC1042 45P
HV20 E
LCD UNIT
IC1047
FOCUS MOTOR FOCUS SENS IG METER HALL SENS IC1043
IC1045 IC1040
TOP COVER ASS'Y

B1
CN1040
A1 50P CN100 CN102 25P
LCD
CMOS SENSOR ASS'Y

B25 12P
A25
31P
CVF FPC ASS'Y

4P
FLASH ASS'Y AUTO FOCUS ASS'Y

17P
31P CN1
CN2
27P
CVF LCD
CN3 1 5 24P
5P
FRONT COVER ASS'Y

2P
2P
20P 25P 25 24 1 2 20P
BACK LIGHT
CN4101
CASSETTE COVER ASS'Y LCD FPC ASS'Y
CVF PCB
IC1692 1 CN4102 20 IC1691
12P
CN100
20P IC902 20P CN15 CN10 27P 1 2 IC903 IC901
LCD PCB
CN901 27 26 1 CN902 24P 24 1 CN50 6
SPEAKER ASS'Y
2P IC2308 2 1 IC2309
HDMI FPC ASS'Y

45P 20P 20
6P 6P
12P CN1600 12 1 IC801 IC1612 IC1613 IC2310 IC1611
31P CN900 30 31 IC109
50P 2 1
45P CN1501 44 45 IC1501 IC2831 IC2833 IC2830

5 1 CN2400 4 6
CN100 1 CN103 2 CN101 1 2 CN104 45 44
5P CN1 45 44 CN2800 1 2 3 CN701 1 2 4 2 1 IC104 45P 1 17P CN1700 44 45 17 CN501 45P
4P CN701 4 1
IC2303
IC2306 IC100 IC2301 IC103
HDV /DV JACK
2P
MIC JACK
IC3500
IC101
IC2800 IC105 IC107 IC106
CARD PCB
IC2307 IC3310 IC3300 20 20P
1 5 6 7 CN102 8 9
REAR PCB LCD KEY ASS'Y
IC102 IC108 IC2801
USB JACK mini SD CARD

2P
AV JACK
3 1
4 CN10 6
5 2
IC1102
CN2830 1
IC1104 IC1200
IC1000
B1 A1 CN1000
IC3260 IC3261 IC110 5 1 2 IC3200
Metal contact (Pins' face down)

:
Metal contact (Pins' face up)

:
2P CN101 2 1 CN3200
COMPONENT JACK
14 12
10 CN20 13 11 1
JACK PCB
2 1 12P 31P IC2802 IC1103 10 CN301 10P CN502 1 CN100
IC1100 IC2000 31 30 45 44 7P 7 1 CN2000 1 CN1200 2 CN102 45P 11 1 CN302 1 2 IC300
B25 A25
MAIN PCB
20 1 CN300 21
CN3201
2P IC501 2P
1 2 1 2
CN503
12 11 IC502
A1 A12 CN100 B12 B1 11P 18 1 CN303
A10 A1 CN2900 B1 B10 18P 5P
DC JACK Metal contact Metal contact
21P
FOCUS DIAL ASS'Y
10P
7P
11P
18P
21P
LOADING MOTOR
VIDEO HEAD
DRUM MOTOR
SLIDE CHASSIS
MAIN CHASSIS
5P
01
Mar. 2007
DMC III
BATTERY TERMINAL
( DIGITAL MECHANICAL CHASSIS III )
CANON INC. 2007
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
MAIN PCB CN100 A1 PCST0 A2 PCST2 A3 PCST4 A4 TPC0 A5 TRST A6 TDO A7 TCK A8 DINT A9 E3V A10 XDEBEN A11 DEBUD A12 GND B1 GND B2 PCST1 B3 PCST3 B4 DCLK B5 GND B6 TDI B7 TMS B8 CCM RESET B9 EJE B10 GND B11 DEBDD B12 DEBCLK CN101 1 GND 2 EJECT SW CN102 1 GND 2 LI RESET 3 D+ 4 N.C. 5 D 6 GND 7 VBUS 8 ZOOM AD 9 GND 10 P.AE/GREEN SW 11 VTR UNREG 12 KEY AD1 13 ACCESS&CHARGE LED 14 START/STOP SW 15 T/C POW SW 16 DVDD2.7V 17 VTR POW SW 18 CAM POW LED 19 CAM POW SW 20 KEY AD0 21 PHOTO SW 22 GND 23 H PHOTO SW 24 LI POW2 25 AVDD2.7V 26 SP+ 27 GND 28 SP 29 GND 30 CARD DET 31 CARD DAT1 32 GND 33 CARD DAT0 34 GND 35 GND 36 CARD CLK 37 GND 38 DVDD2.7V 39 CARD CMD 40 GND 41 GND 42 CARD DAT3 43 CARD DAT2 44 GND 45 GND CN300 1 BOT E 2 BOT C 3 MIC GND 4 MIC3 5 REC Prf 6 MIC2 7 MIC1 8 Tin 9 Tout 10 Tin+ 11 Tout+ 12 C IN 13 CIN GND 14 LED A 15 LED K 16 Sin 17 Sout 18 Sin+ 19 Sout+ 20 EOT E 21 EOT C CN301 1 LOAD(+) 2 LOAD(+) 3 MSW Vss 4 MSW Vcc 5 MSW Sens 6 LOAD() 7 LOAD() 8 DEW+ 9 DEW 10 N.C CN302 1 U 2 U 3 V 4 V 5 DFG 6 DPG 7 Sens COM 8 Sens Gard 9 Coil COM 10 W 11 W CN303 1 CFG1 2 CFG Vcc 3 CFG GND 4 CFG2 5 v 6 v+ 7 u 8 u+ 9 C H+ 10 w+ 11 w 12 C H 13 Vcoil 14 Vcoil 15 Wcoil 16 Wcoil 17 Ucoil 18 Ucoil MAIN PCB CN701 1 INT MIC GND L 2 INT MIC L 3 INT MIC GND R 4 INT MIC R CN900 1 NMF CCW SW 2 KEY AD3 3 NMF CW SW 4 GND(KEY GND) 5 PANEL BT SW 6 LCD BL POW 7 LCD BL POW 8 (N.C) 9 LCD BL VFB 10 (N.C) 11 LCD ON 12 LCD EEP SIN V 13 LCD/EEP SCLK 14 LCD/EEP SO 15 LCD/EEP CS V 16 LCD CS 17 LCD8.5V 18 LCD3.0V 19 LCD5V 20 LCD3.0V 21 C SYNC 22 GND 23 GND 24 PANEL B 25 PANEL R 26 PANEL G 27 GND 28 KEY AD3 29 KEY AD4 30 GND(KEY GND) 31 PANEL OPEN SW CN1000 A1 GND A2 GR L A3 GR L+ A4 GR U A5 GR U+ A6 GR CLK+ A7 GR CLK A8 GND A9 B CLK A10 B CLK+ A11 B L+ A12 B L A13 B U+ A14 B U A15 GND A16 AFE TXD A17 AFE SCK A18 CCD TEMP A19 AFEG XCS A20 XRESET A21 CS A22 SDATA A23 SCK A24 GND A25 SENS 1.0V B1 GND B2 GB CLK B3 GB CLK+ B4 GB L+ B5 GB L B6 GB U+ B7 GB U B8 GND B9 R L B10 R L+ B11 R U B12 R U+ B13 R CLK+ B14 R CLK B15 GND B16 CAM ON B17 AFE HD B18 AFE VD B19 AFEB XCS B20 AFER XCS B21 GND B22 AFE1.8V B23 AFE1.8V B24 AVDD3V B25 CAM5.1V CN1200 1 FOCUS VCC 2 FOCUS anaA 3 FOCUS anaB 4 FOCUS TARG 5 FOCUS GND 6 ZOOM B 7 ZOOM A 8 ZOOM B+ 9 ZOOM A+ 10 ND DRIVE+ 11 ND DRIVE 12 ND HALL IN+ 13 ND HALL OUT+ 14 ND HALL IN 15 ND HALL OUT 16 GND No Connect 17 FOCUS DRIVE+ 18 FOCUS DRIVE 19 GND No Connect 20 ZOOM SENS 21 ZOOM VCC 22 ZOOM LED 23 L TEMP 24 L TEMP 2.7V 25 IG DRIVE 26 IG DRIVE+ 27 IG HALL IN+ 28 IG HALL OUT+ 29 IG HALL IN 30 IG HALL OUT 31 IG HALL OUT MAIN PCB CN1501 1 SHOE UNREG SW 2 SHOE UNREG SW 3 SHOE UNREG SW 4 SHOE UNREG SW 5 SHOE GND 6 SHOE GND 7 SHOE GND 8 SHOE GND 9 SHOE ID1 10 ST VDHGL[1] 11 ST TMG 1 12 SHOE ID2 13 ADV MIC GND 14 ADV MIC L 15 ADV/EXT MIC R 16 GND(KEY GND) 17 KEY AD2 18 DIRECTPRINT LED 19 P5V 20 AVDD2.7V 21 P GY OUT 22 GND(GY GND) 23 Y GY OUT 24 GND(EVF VSS) 25 EVF COM AC 26 EVF PSIG 27 EVF G 28 EVF R 29 EVF B 30 EVF PCG 31 EVF ENB 32 EVF VCK 33 EVF VST 34 EVF XSTB 35 EVF REF 36 EVF NRW 37 EVF HCK1 38 EVF HCK2 39 EVF HST 40 EVF VSSG 41 EVF 8.5V(EVF VDD) 42 GND(EVF VSS) 43 P5V 44 EVF BL2.7V 45 EVF BL2.7V CN1600 1 T HALL IN 2 T HALL OUT + 3 T HALL OUT 4 T HALL IN + 5 Y DRIVE A 6 Y DRIVE B 7 P DRIVE B 8 P DRIVE A 9 P HALL IN + 10 P HALL OUT 11 P HALL OUT + 12 P HALL IN CN1700 1 MISO 2 /TINTE 3 VVC 4 AFAD 5 SGND 6 VGR 7 VAREF 8 VCC 9 MOSI 10 SCLK 11 SGND(N.C.) 12 READ 13 VCC 14 AFCLK 15 CLKO 16 CSAF 17 DGND CN2000 1 HA GND 2 H2B 3 H2A 4 HA GND 5 H1B 6 H1A 7 HA GND CN2400 1 XTPB 2 TPB 3 XTPA 4 TPA 5 E1 6 E2 CN2800 1 GND 2 BARRMO OUT2[A] 3 BARRMO OUT1[A] 4 BARRMO OUT4[B] 5 BARRMO OUT3[B] 6 BARRSW CLOSE 7 BARRSW LED 8 BARRSW OPEN 9 WHITE LED 10 RMC IN 11 STROBE3V 12 P5V 13 ST UNREG 14 ST UNREG 15 ST UNREG 16 ST UNREG 17 ST TMG ON 18 ST TMG 19 ST EFCHG 20 ST VDHGL 21 ST GND 22 ST GND 23 ST GND 24 ST GND 25 GND 26 Y 27 Y GND 28 PB 29 PB/PC GND 30 PR 31 GND 32 D ID1 33 D ID3 34 D DET 35 AV GND 36 V I/O/HP R 37 AV JACK DET 38 AV GND 39 AV L/HP L 40 AV R 41 MIC GND 42 EXT L 43 ADV/EXT MIC R 44 EXT P DET 45 MAIN PCB CN2830 1 DDC/CEC GROUND 2 HPD 3 +5V 4 +5V 5 SDA 6 SCL 7 Clock Shield 8 Clock 9 Clock+ 10 D0 Shield 11 D0 12 D0+ 13 D1 Shield 14 D1 15 D1+ 16 D2 Shield 17 D2 18 D2+ 19 GND 20 GND CN2900 A1 EVF COM DC A2 N.C. A3 EVF COM AC A4 VTR UNREG A5 MIC2 A6 MIC3 A7 GND A8 EVF B A9 EVF G A10 EVF R B1 V I/O/HP R B2 GND B3 VTR POW SW B4 EVF HD B5 CAM POW SW B6 FCH 0 B7 N.C. B8 SWP B9 GND B10 PBRF CN3201 1 BATT 2 BATT 3 BATT TEMP 4 BATT+ 5 BATT+ LCD PCB CN50 1 KEY GND 2 STOP 3 PLAY 4 FF 5 REW 6 KEY GND CN901 1 KEY GND 2 KEY AD4 3 KEY AD3 4 GND 5 PANEL G 6 (N.C) 7 PANEL R 8 (N.C) 9 PANEL B 10 GND 11 GND 12 C SYNC 13 LCD3.0V 14 LCD5V 15 LCD3.0V 16 LCD8.5V 17 LCD CS 18 LCD EEP CS V 19 LCD/EEP SO 20 LCD/EEP SCLK 21 LCD EEP SIN V 22 LCD ON 23 (N.C) 24 LCD BL VFB 25 (N.C) 26 LCD BL POW 27 LCD BL POW CN902 1 COM2 2 RGT 3 BLUE 4 RED 5 GREEN 6 PSIG 7 HCK1 8 HCK2 9 NRW 10 TEST 11 REF 12 HST 13 PCG 14 XSTBY 15 VSSG 16 N.C. 17 GND(VSS) 18 VDD 19 DWN 20 EN 21 VCK 22 VST 23 CS 24 LCD COM AC(COM1) JACK PCB CN10 1 AUDIO R 2 GND DET 3 GND 4 VIDEO 5 AUDIO L 6 PLUG IN CN20 1 Y 2 Y GND 3 PB 4 PB/PC GND 5 PR 6 DET1 7 DET3 8 DET2 9 D DET 10 D DET GND 11 E1 12 E2 13 E3 14 E4 CN100 1 P5V 2 WHITE LED 3 RMC IN 4 GND 5 BARRSW CLOSE 6 BAR LED CL 7 BARRSW OPEN 8 BAR LED OP 9 BARRMO OUT4[B] 10 BARRMO OUT1[A] 11 BARRMO OUT3[B] 12 BARRMO OUT2[A] CN501 1 EXT P DET 2 ADV/EXT MIC R 3 EXT L 4 MIC GND 5 AV R 6 AV L/HP L 7 AV GND 8 AV JACK DET 9 V I/O/HP R 10 AV GND 11 D DET 12 D ID3 13 D ID1 14 D GND 15 PR D PR 7 16 PB/PC GND D GND 17 PB D PB 7 18 Y GND D GND 19 Y D Y 5 20 GND D GND 21 ST GND 22 ST GND 23 ST GND 24 ST GND 25 ST VDHGL 26 ST EFCHG 27 ST TMG 28 ST TMG ON 29 ST UNREG 30 ST UNREG 31 ST UNREG 32 ST UNREG 33 P5V 34 STROBE3V 35 RMC IN 36 WHITE LED 37 BARRSW OPEN 38 BARRSW LED 39 BARRSW CLOSE 40 BARRMO OUT3[B] 41 BARRMO OUT4[B] 42 BARRMO OUT1[A] 43 BARRMO OUT2[A] 44 GND 45 CN502 1 Xe() 2 Xe(+) CN503 1 T[] 2 T[+] CARD PCB CN100 1 TAPE/CARD SW 2 GND 3 VTR POW SW 4 CAM POW SW 5 PHOTO SW 6 H PHOTO SW 7 AVDD2.7V 8 ZOOM AD 9 GND 10 P.AE/GREEN SW 11 KEY AD1 FUNC 12 START/STOP SW 13 DVDD2.7V 14 CAM POW LED 15 KEY AD0 L 16 KEY AD0 C 17 KEY AD1 D 18 KEY AD0 R 19 GND 20 KEY AD1 U CN101 1 CD/DAT3 2 CMD 3 VSS1 4 VDD 5 CLK 6 VSS2 7 DAT0 8 DAT1 9 DAT2 10 NC1 11 NC2 12 CARD DET 13 COM 14 G3 15 G4 16 G1 17 G2 CN102 1 VBUS 2 D+ 3 D 4 NC 5 GND 6 GND 7 GND 8 GND 9 GND CN103 1 SP 2 SP+ CN104 1 GND 2 CARD DAT2 3 CARD DAT3 4 GND 5 GND 6 CARD CMD 7 DVDD2.7V 8 GND 9 CARD CLK 10 GND 11 GND 12 CARD DAT0 13 GND 14 CARD DAT1 15 CARD DET 16 GND 17 SP 18 GND 19 SP+ 20 AVDD2.7V 21 LI POW2 22 H PHOTO SW 23 GND USB 24 PHOTO SW 25 KEY AD0 26 CAM POW SW 27 CAM POW LED 28 VTR POW SW 29 DVDD2.7V 30 T/C POW SW 31 START/STOP SW 32 ACCESS&CHARGE LED 33 KEY AD1 34 VTR UNREG 35 P.AE/GREEN SW 36 GND 37 ZOOM AD 38 VBUS 39 GND USB 40 D 41 N.C. 42 D+ 43 LI RESET 44 GND USB 45 GND USB LCD FPC ASS'Y CN1 1 MF CCW SW 2 KEY AD3 3 MF CW SW 4 KEY GND 5 PANEL BT SW 6 LCD BL POW 7 LCD BL POW 8 (N.C) 9 LCD BL VFB 10 (N.C) 11 LCD ON 12 LCD EEP SIN V 13 LCD/EEP SCLK 14 LCD/EEP SO 15 LCD/EEP CS V 16 LCD CS 17 LCD8.5V 18 LCD3.0V 19 LCD5V 20 LCD3.0V 21 C SYNC 22 GND 23 GND 24 PANEL B 25 PANEL R 26 PANEL G 27 GND 28 KEY AD3 29 KEY AD4 30 KEY GND 31 PANEL OPEN SW CN2 1 KEY GND 2 KEY AD4 3 KEY AD3 4 GND 5 PANEL G 6 (N.C) 7 PANEL R 8 (N.C) 9 PANEL B 10 GND 11 GND 12 C SYNC 13 LCD3.0V 14 LCD5V 15 LCD3.0V 16 LCD8.5V 17 LCD CS 18 LCD EEP CS V 19 LCD/EEP SO 20 LCD/EEP SCLK 21 LCD EEP SIN V 22 LCD ON 23 (N.C) 24 LCD BL VFB 25 (N.C) 26 LCD BL POW 27 LCD BL POW CN3 1 KEY GND 2 KEY GND 3 MF CW SW 4 KEY AD3 5 MF CCW SW
HV20 E
CVF FPC ASS'Y CN100 1 SHOE UNREG SW 2 SHOE UNREG SW 3 SHOE UNREG SW 4 SHOE UNREG SW 5 SHOE GND 6 SHOE GND 7 SHOE GND 8 SHOE GND 9 SHOE ID1 10 ST VDHGL[1] 11 ST TMG 1 12 SHOE ID2 13 ADV MIC GND 14 ADV MIC L 15 ADV/EXT MIC R 16 GND 17 KEY AD2 18 DIRECTPRINT LED 19 P5V 20 AVDD2.7V 21 P GY OUT 22 GND(GY GND) 23 Y GY OUT 24 GND(EVF VSS) 25 EVF COM AC 26 EVF PSIG 27 EVF G 28 EVF R 29 EVF B 30 EVF PCG 31 EVF ENB 32 EVF VCK 33 EVF VST 34 EVF XSTB 35 EVF REF 36 EVF NRW 37 EVF HCK1 38 EVF HCK2 39 EVF HST 40 EVF VSSG 41 EVF 8.5V 42 GND(EVF VSS) 43 P5V 44 EVF BL2.7V 45 EVF BL2.7V CN102 1 AVDD2.7V 2 P GY OUT 3 GND(GY GND) 4 Y GY OUT 5 GND(VSS) 6 EVF COM AC(COM) 7 PSIG 8 EVF G 9 EVF R 10 EVF B 11 PCG 12 ENB 13 VCK 14 VST 15 XSTB 16 REF 17 NRW 18 HCK1 19 HCK2 20 HST 21 VSSG 22 EVF8.5(VDD) 23 GND(VSS) 24 GND(VSS) 25 GND(VSS)
CMOS SENSOR ASS'Y CN1040 A1 GND A2 GR L A3 GR L+ A4 GR U A5 GR U+ A6 GR CLK+ A7 GR CLK A8 GND A9 B CLK A10 B CLK+ A11 B L+ 1A2 B L A13 B U+ A14 B U A15 GND A16 AFE TXD A17 AFE SCK A18 CCD TEMP A19 AFEG XCS A20 XRESET A21 CS A22 SDATA A23 SCK A24 GND A25 SENS 1.0V B1 GND B2 GB CLK B3 GB CLK+ B4 GB L+ B5 GB L B6 GB U+ B7 GB U B8 GND B9 R L B10 R L+ B11 R U B12 R U+ B13 R CLK+ B14 R CLK B15 GND B16 CAM ON B17 AFE HD B18 AFE VD B19 AFEB XCS B20 AFER XCS B21 GND B22 AFE1.8V B23 AFE1.8V B24 AVDD3V B25 CAM5.1V
HDMI FPC ASS'Y CN10 1 DDC/CEC GROUND 2 HPD 3 +5V 4 +5V 5 SDA 6 SCL 7 Clock Shield 8 Clock 9 Clock+ 10 D0 Shield 11 D0 12 D0+ 13 D1 Shield 14 D1 15 D1+ 16 D2 Shield 17 D2 18 D2+ 19 GND 20 GND CN15 1 TMDS DATA2+ 2 TMDS DATA2 SHIELD 3 TMDS DATA2 4 TMDS DATA1+ 5 TMDS DATA1 SHIELD 6 TMDS DATA1 7 TMDS DATA0+ 8 TMDS DATA0 SHIELD 9 TMDS DATA0 10 TMDS CLOCK+ 11 TMDS CLOCK SHIELD 12 TMDS CLOCK 13 CEC 14 NC 15 SCL 16 SDA 17 DDC/CEC GROUND 18 +5V POWER 19 HOT PLUG DETECT 20 SHELL1 21 SHELL2 22 SHELL3 23 SHELL4
FRONT FPC ASS'Y CN100 1 P5V 2 WHITE LED 3 RMC IN 4 GND 5 BARRSW CLOSE 6 BAR LED CL 7 BARRSW OPEN 8 BAR LED OP 9 BARRMO OUT4 10 BARRMO OUT1 11 BARRMO OUT3 12 BARRMO OUT2
CVF PCB CN4101 1 AVDD2.7V 2 P GY OUT 3 GY GND 4 Y GY OUT 5 EVF VSS 6 EVF COM AC 7 EVF PSIG 8 EVF G 9 EVF R 10 EVF B 11 EVF PCG 12 EVF ENB 13 EVF VCK 14 EVF VST 15 EVF XSTB 16 EVF REF 17 EVF NRW 18 EVF HCK1 19 EVF HCK2 20 EVF HST 21 EVF VSSG 22 EVF VDD 23 EVF VSS 24 EVF VSS 25 EVF VSS CN4102 1 VDD 2 VSS 3 VSSG 4 HST 5 HCK2 6 HCK1 7 RGT 8 NRW 9 DWN 10 REF 11 XSTB 12 VST 13 VCK 14 ENB 15 PCG 16 BLUE 17 RED 18 GREEN 19 PSIG 20 COM
FOCUS DIAL ASS'Y CN1 1 KEY GND 2 KEY GND 3 MF CW SW 4 KEY AD3 5 MF CCW SW
CAMERA SECTION-1
ANALOG IMAGE SIGNAL DIGITAL IMAGE SIGNAL CPU BUS SIGNAL
HV20 E
CMOS SENSOR PCB
MAIN PCB(1/10)
DOUT0N B H1 DOUT0P B G1 DOUT1N B D1 DOUT1P B C1 TCLKP B E1 TCLKN B F1 DOUT0N A J2 DOUT0P A J1 DOUT1N A E2 DOUT1P A D2 TCLKP A F2 TCLKN A G2
R L R L+ R U R U+ R CLK+ R CLK B L B L+ B U B U+ B CLK+ B CLK
IC1041 AD9973BBCZ AFE

HD A C3 HD B C4 VD A B5 VD B C5 SCK A C6 OUT1S AFE HD AFE VD TG XRST TG TXD TG SCK TG XCS 19 HD 20 VD 17 XRESET 10 SDI 11 SCLK 12 CS MCLK 18 K9 RG B K2 H18 OUT1N 2 3 E10 CCDINP B D10 CCDINM B E9 CCDINP A D9 CCDINM A SCK B A7 SDATA A C7 SDATA B A8 SL A B7 SL B A9 CLI A H9 CLI B H10 AFE HD AFE HD AFE VD AFE VD AFE SCK AFE SCK AFE TXD AFE TXD AFEB XCS AFER XCS AFE2.7V 4 1 CONT AFE1.8V VIN 5
OUT4S 24 OUT4N 25
IC1046 LD1020 CMOS

VTXH 22 VTXL 7 VTXH 4.2V
IC1047 VOUT NJM2877F3-28 2.7V REGULATOR
VTXL 1.35V TH1040 DOUT0N B H1 VTXL 1.35V DOUT0P B G1 DOUT1N B D1 GR L GR L+ GR U GR U+ GR CLK+ GR CLK GB L GB L+ GB U GB U+ GB CLK+ GB CLK SENS VDD5V VTXH 4.2V 4 SENS VDD5V 4 VOUT 1
CN1040 R L R L+ R U R U+ R CLK+ R CLK B CLK B CLK+ B L+ B L B U+ B U GR L GR L+ GR U GR U+ GR CLK+ GR CLK GB CLK GB CLK+ GB L+ GB L GB U+ GB U AFE HD AFE VD AFE SCK AFE TXD AFEB XCS AFER XCS AFEG XCS XRESET CS SDATA SCK AFE1.8V AFE1.8V AVDD3V CAM ON CAM5.1V SENS 1.0V CCD TEMP
B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B17 B18 A17 A16 B19 B20 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 B22 B23 B24 B16 B25 A25 A18
B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B17 B18 A17 A16 B19 B20 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 B16 A18 B22 B23 B24 B25 A25
CN1000 R L R L+ R U R U+ R CLK+ R CLK B CLK B CLK+ B L+ B L B U+ B U GR L GR L+ GR U GR U+ GR CLK+ GR CLK GB CLK GB CLK+ GB L+ GB L GB U+ GB U AFE HD AFE VD AFE SCK AFE TXD AFEB XCS AFER XCS AFEG XCS XRESET CS SDATA SCK CAM ON CCD TEMP AFE1.8V AFE1.8V AVDD3V CAM5.1V SENS 1.0V
R L R L+ R U R U+ R CLK+ R CLK
DATA(0) C12 P4 DI00 N4 DI00+ P5 DI01 N5 DI01+ N3 CLKI0+ P3 CLKI0 DATA(1) B12 DATA(2) B13 DATA(3) A13 DATA(4) A12 DATA(5) C11 DATA(6) B11 DATA(7) A11
B L B L+ B U B U+ B CLK+ B CLK
L13 DI30 L12 DI30+ K12 DI31 K11 DI31+ N13 CLKI3+ M13 CLKI3
DATA(8) D10 DATA(9) B10 DATA(10) A10 DATA(11) E9 DATA(12) D9 DATA(13) C9 DATA(14) B9
GR L GR L+ GR U GR U+ GR CLK+ GR CLK
M11 DI20 N11 DI20+ M12 DI21 N12 DI21+ N10 CLKI2+ M10 CLKI2
DATA(15) A9
EDATA M DATA0 to 15 EADDR M ADD0 to 15
TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN PCB
ADR(0) H12 ADR(1) H13 ADR(2) H14
AFE1.8V AVDD3V CAM5.35V SENS 1.35V
GB L GB L+ GB U GB U+ GB CLK+ GB CLK
IC1000 MB87M8201BGL-GE1 MPX4
ADR(3) G10 ADR(4) G11 ADR(5) G14 ADR(6) F11 ADR(7) F12 ADR(8) F13 ADR(9) F14 ADR(10) E10 ADR(11) E11 ADR(12) E12 ADR(13) E13
N8 DI10 P8 DI10+ K9 DI11 K8 DI11+ M7 CLKI1+ N7 CLKI1
SENS VDD5V
VDD1 CONT
21 VDD2
IC1043 NJM2877F3-05 5.0V REGULATOR
VIN
23 VRESL OUT3S 13 VCHR/VC0R OUT3N 5 4 E9 CCDINP A D9 CCDINM A E10 CCDINP B D10 CCDINM B
DOUT1P B C1 TCLKP B E1 TCLKN B F1 DOUT0N A J2 DOUT0P A J1 DOUT1N A E2 DOUT1P A D2 TCLKP A F2 TCLKN A G2
L2 HDO L1 VDO
ADR(14) D13 ADR(15) D14 DO00 H4 DOUT00 N DOUT00 P DOUT01 N DOUT01 P TCLK00 N TCLK00 P DOUT10 N DOUT10 P DOUT11 N DOUT11 P TCLK01 N TCLK01 P TO CAMERA SECTION-2 MAIN PCB
OUT2S 27 OUT2N 26
IC1044 VOUT NJM2877F3-42 4.2V REGULATOR

CONT 1
DO00+ H5 VIN 5 MPX RDY MPX XRST XEWRL M XERD M MPX XCS DO01 J2 DO01+ J3 C8 XRDY A7 XRESET D7 WE D8 RD B8 CS CLKO0 H3 CLKO0+ H2 DO10 F2 DO10+ F1 DO11 F5 DO11+ F4
IC1042 AD9973BBCZ AFE

HD A C3 HD B C4 VD A B5 VD B C5 SCK A C6 SCK B A7 SDATA A C7 SDATA B A8 SL A B7 SL B A9 CLI A H9 CLI B H10 AFE HD AFE HD AFE VD AFE VD AFE SCK AFE SCK AFE TXD AFE TXD AFEG XCS AFEG XCS 1 3 X1040 4 2
IC1040 TC7SZU04FU INVERTER
K3 HDI K4 VDI
CLKO1 G2 CLKO1+ G3
IC1045 NJM12904R AMP

3 1 2 5 7 6 AFE2.7V
TGVD TGHD MPX RDY MPX XRST XEWRL M XERD M MPX XCS AFE TXD AFE SCK AFER XCS AFEG XCS AFEB XCS TG XRST TG XCS TG TXD TG SCK CAM ON CCD TEMP
01
Mar. 2007
CANON INC. 2007
CAMERA SECTION-2
MAIN PCB(2/10)
DIGITAL IMAGE SIGNAL
DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL
CPU BUS SIGNAL
HV20 E
E DATA8 to 15 E ADD0 to 2 XEWRU XERD TCK TMS TRST EDATA10 EDATA11 EDATA12 EDATA13 EDATA14 EDATA15 EDATA8 EDATA9 TO RECORDER SECTION-2 MAIN PCB
EADDR M(7) AC17
EADDR M(8) AD17
EADDR M(12) AD16
EADDR M(15) AC15
EADDR M(16) AD15
EADDR M(20) AC14
EADDR M(21) AD14
MADDR L(10)
MADDR L(11)
MADDR L(13)
MADDR L(14)
DQ0 R8 XMWE L XMCAS L XMRAS L XMCS L MCLK L MCKE L MDQM L3 MDQM L2 MDQM L1 MDQM L0 MADDR L0 MADDR L1 MADDR L2 MADDR L3 MADDR L4 MADDR L5 MADDR L6 MADDR L7 MADDR L8 MADDR L9 MADDR L10 MADDR L11 MADDR L13 MADDR L14 K8 /WE K7 /CAS J9 /RAS J8 /CS J1 CLK J2 CKE F2 DQM3 F8 DQM2 K1 DQM1 K9 DQM0 G8 A0 G9 A1 F7 A2 F3 A3 G1 A4 G2 A5 G3 A6 H1 A7 H2 A8 J3 A9 G7 A10 H9 A11 J7 BA0 H8 BA1 DQ1 N7 DQ2 R9 DQ3 N8 DQ4 P9 DQ5 M8 DQ6 M7 DQ7 L8 DQ8 L2 DQ9 M3 DQ10 M2 DQ11 P1 DQ12 N2 DQ13 R1 DQ14 N3
MDATA L0 MDATA L1 MDATA L2 MDATA L3 MDATA L4 MDATA L5 MDATA L6 MDATA L7 MDATA L8 MDATA L9 MDATA L10 MDATA L11 MDATA L12 MDATA L13 MDATA L14 MDATA L15 MDATA L16 MDATA L17 MDATA L18 MDATA L19 MDATA L20 MDATA L21 MDATA L22 MDATA L23 MDATA L24 MDATA L25 MDATA L26 MDATA L27 MDATA L28 MDATA L29 MDATA L30 MDATA L31
M23 M21 L25 L24 L23 L21 K25 K23 J25 J24 J23 J21 J20 M20 G21 G20 F20 E21 E20 A19 B19 C19 F19 A18 C18 E18 F18 A17 B17 C17 E17 F17
MDATA L(0) MDATA L(1) MDATA L(2) MDATA L(3) MDATA L(4) MDATA L(5) MDATA L(6) MDATA L(7) MDATA L(8) MDATA L(9) MDATA L(10) MDATA L(11) MDATA L(12) MDATA L(13) MDATA L(14) MDATA L(15) MDATA L(16) MDATA L(17) MDATA L(18) MDATA L(19) MDATA L(20) MDATA L(21) MDATA L(22) MDATA L(23) MDATA L(24) MDATA L(25) MDATA L(26) MDATA L(27) MDATA L(28) MDATA L(29) MDATA L(30) MDATA L(31)
EADDR M(24) AC13
EADDR M(1) AA19
EADDR M(3) AA18
EADDR M(4) AE18
EADDR M(6) AA17
EADDR M(9) AE17
EADDR M(11) AA16
EADDR M(13) AE16
EADDR M(14) AA15
EADDR M(17) AE15
EADDR M(19) AA14
EADDR M(22) AE14
EADDR M(23) AA13
Y19
Y18
Y17
Y16
AC3
AD3
AD2
AA1
AA2
AA3
AB1
G25
AB2
G23
C24
C20
C21
C22
D23
D24
H25
H23
H24
D25
B20
A24
A22
B21
E23
E24
B25
A20
A21
E25
F21
F25
AE3
AC1
AE2
AE4
W1
EADDR M(0)
EADDR M(2)
EADDR M(5)
EADDR M(10)
EADDR M(18)
XEWR S
XECS S
XMCAS L
MADDR L(0)
MADDR L(1)
MADDR L(2)
MADDR L(3)
MADDR L(4)
MADDR L(5)
MADDR L(6)
MADDR L(7)
MADDR L(8)
MADDR L(9)
XMWE L
EDATA S(0)
EDATA S(1)
EDATA S(2)
EDATA S(3)
EDATA S(4)
EDATA S(5)
EDATA S(6)
EDATA S(7)
XMRAS L
MDQM L(3)
MDQM L(2)
MDQM L(1)
MDQM L(0)
EADDR S(0)
EADDR S(1)
EADDR S(2)
XEINT S
XMCS L
MCKE L
MCLK L
XERD S
Y14
Y1
Y2
EDATA M(0) AD10 EDATA M(1) AE10 EDATA M(2) EDATA M(3) EDATA M(4) EDATA M(5) EDATA M(6) EDATA M(7) EDATA M(8) EDATA M(9) EDATA M(10) EDATA M(11) EDATA M(12) EDATA M(13) EDATA M(14) EDATA M(15) ADATA(0) ADATA(1) ADATA(2) ADATA(3) ADATA(4) ADATA(5) ADATA(6) ADATA(7) BDATA(0) BDATA(1) BDATA(2) BDATA(3) BDATA(4) BDATA(5) AA9 AC9 AD9 AE9 AD8 AE8 AD7 AE7 AC6 AD6 AE6 AC5 AD5 AE5 U1 U2 U3 V1 V2 V3 W3 Y3 R2 R3 R5 T1 T2 T3 V5 W5 Y6 R1 M1 J1 H1 K5 K3 K6 J2 K2 AUD1 MACS TO VIC/TRI AUD2 MACS TO VIC/TRI AUD1 VIC TO MACS AUD2 VIC TO MACS DOUT00 P DOUT00 N TCLK00 P TCLK00 N DOUT01 P DOUT01 N DOUT10 P DOUT10 N TCLK01 P TCLK01 N DOUT11 P DOUT11 N
EADDR M ADD0 to 24 EDATA M DATA0 to 15 MACS RDY MACS XCS XEWRL M XEWRU M XERD M MACS XINT1 MACS XINT0 MACS TDO MACS XRST ST TMG 1
TO CVF SECTION MAIN PCB
IC1103 EDS1232ECBH-75-E SDRAM
DQ15 R2 DQ16 E8 DQ17 D7 DQ18 D8 DQ19 B9 DQ20 C8 DQ21 A9 DQ22 C7 DQ23 A8 DQ24 A2 DQ25 C3 DQ26 A1 DQ27 C2 DQ28 B1 DQ29 D2 DQ30 D3 DQ31 E2
CAM A DATA0 to 7 CAM B DATA0 to 7 XHD MACS CLK MACS VCLK MACS LRCK WCK BASIL TDO ST TMG
TO RECORDER SECTION-1 MAIN PCB
IC1100 MB8AA1150BGL-GE1 DIGIC DV II
BDATA(6) BDATA(7) XHD CAM CLK CAM VCLK
XMWE U XMCAS U XMRAS U XMCS U MCLK U MCKE U MDQM U3 MDQM U2 MDQM U1 MDQM U0 MADDR U0 MADDR U1 MADDR U2 MADDR U3 MADDR U4 MADDR U5 MADDR U6 MADDR U7 MADDR U8 MADDR U9 MADDR U10 MADDR U11 MADDR U13 MADDR U14
K8 /WE K7 /CAS J9 /RAS J8 /CS J1 CLK J2 CKE F2 DQM3 F8 DQM2 K1 DQM1 K9 DQM0 G8 A0 G9 A1 F7 A2 F3 A3 G1 A4 G2 A5 G3 A6 H1 A7 H2 A8 J3 A9 G7 A10 H9 A11 J7 BA0 H8 BA1
DQ0 R8 DQ1 N7 DQ2 R9 DQ3 N8 DQ4 P9 DQ5 M8 DQ6 M7 DQ7 L8 DQ8 L2 DQ9 M3 DQ10 M2 DQ11 P1 DQ12 N2 DQ13 R1 DQ14 N3
MDATA U0 MDATA U1 MDATA U2 MDATA U3 MDATA U4 MDATA U5 MDATA U6 MDATA U7 MDATA U8 MDATA U9 MDATA U10 MDATA U11 MDATA U12 MDATA U13 MDATA U14 MDATA U15 MDATA U16 MDATA U17 MDATA U18 MDATA U19 MDATA U20 MDATA U21 MDATA U22 MDATA U23 MDATA U24 MDATA U25 MDATA U26 MDATA U27 MDATA U28 MDATA U29 MDATA U30 MDATA U31
AE19 AD19 AC19 AE20 AD20 AC20 AE21 AD21 AE22 AD22 AC22 AE23 AD23 AE24 AC24 AE25 T20 R24 R23 R21 R20 P25 P24 P21 N25 N24 N23 N21 N20 M25 M20 L20
MDATA U(0) MDATA U(1) MDATA U(2) MDATA U(3) MDATA U(4) MDATA U(5) MDATA U(6) MDATA U(7) MDATA U(8) MDATA U(9) MDATA U(10) MDATA U(11) MDATA U(12) MDATA U(13) MDATA U(14) MDATA U(15) MDATA U(16) MDATA U(17) MDATA U(18) MDATA U(19) MDATA U(20) MDATA U(21) MDATA U(22) MDATA U(23) MDATA U(24) MDATA U(25) MDATA U(26) MDATA U(27) MDATA U(28) MDATA U(29) STROBE TMG(0)
LRCLK WCLK TDI AUDO1 AUDO2 AUDI1 AUDI2
MACS CS MACS INT AUD1 MACS TO VIC/TRI AUD2 MACS TO VIC/TRI AUD1 VIC TO MACS AUD2 VIC TO MACS
RAW SDA(0) P B15 RAW SDA(0) N B14 RAW SCKA P A15 RAW SCKA N A14 RAW SDA(1) P C15 RAW SDA(1) N C14 RAW SDB(0) P B13 RAW SDB(0) N B12 RAW SCKB P A13 RAW SCKB N A12 RAW SDB(1) P C13 RAW SDB(1) N C12
IC1102 EDS1232ECBH-75-E SDRAM
DQ15 R2 DQ16 E8 DQ17 D7 DQ18 D8 DQ19 B9 DQ20 C8 DQ21 A9 DQ22 C7 DQ23 A8 DQ24 A2 DQ25 C3 DQ26 A1 DQ27 C2 DQ28 B1 DQ29 D2 DQ30 D3 DQ31 E2
DOUT00 P DOUT00 N TCLK00 P TCLK00 N DOUT01 P DOUT01 N DOUT10 P DOUT10 N TCLK01 P TCLK01 N DOUT11 P DOUT11 N TGHD TGVD
TO CAMERA SECTION-1 MAIN PCB
TGHD TGVD
F6 B5
MADDR U(10)
MADDR U(11)
MADDR U(13)
MADDR U(0)
MADDR U(1)
MADDR U(2)
MADDR U(3)
MADDR U(4)
MADDR U(5)
MADDR U(6)
MADDR U(7)
MADDR U(8)
MADDR U(9)
MDQM U(3)
MDQM U(2)
MDQM U(1)
MDQM U(0)
MCDT A(3)
MCDT A(2)
MCDT A(1)
MCDT A(0)
MDATA U(31)
MADDR U(14)
XMRAS U
VDDE G1
XEWRU M
XEWRL M
XMCAS U
VDDE C1
VDDE C2
VDDE C4
VDDE C3
VDDE A7
VDDE A8
VDDE E1
VDDE F1
VDDE F2
XMWE U
AC12
AD13
AC10
AC16
AA20
AA21
AB24
AB23
AA25
AB25
AA10
AC11
AE13 XRESET
XMCS U
MCKE U
MCLK U
XERD M
XECS M
TRST
RDY
TMS
W20
W23
W24
W25
AD1
AC7
AA6
Y10
U21
U23
U24
U25
V23
V24
V25
Y25
Y24
V20
V21
Y13
T21
T23
T24
Y12
G1
TDO
TCK
L1
G3
D1
C3
C1
D2
H6
C2
B2
A3
A7
B1
F5
L6
J6
L2
STROBE TMG(1)
MDATA U(30) MCCMD A MCCLK A
XEINT(0)
XEINT(1)
DVDD2.7V MACS XINT0 MACS XINT1 CN102 DVDD2.7V CARD CLK CARD DAT3 CARD DAT2 CARD DAT1 CARD DAT0 CARD CMD MACS XRST CARD DAT3 CARD DAT2 CARD DAT1 CARD DAT0 CARD CMD MACS RDY MACS TDO MACS XCS CARD CLK 38 36 42 43 31 33 39 TO CARD, REAR PCB, HDMI FPC ASS'Y SECTION CARD PCB CN104
DVDD2.7V
01
Mar. 2007
CANON INC. 2007
CAMERA SECTION-3
MAIN PCB(3/10)
HV20 E
Y DRIVE A Y DRIVE B CN1600 Y DRIVE A Y DRIVE B P DRIVE B P DRIVE A Y HALL OUT+ Y HALL OUT Y HALL IN Y HALL IN+ P HALL OUT P HALL OUT+ P HALL IN P HALL IN+
10 OUT2 13 OUT2B 6 3 OUT1 OUT1B
VM1 VM2
4 5
P5V
TO LENS UNIT
5 6 7 8 2 3 1 4 10 11 12 9
IC1613 LMV324IPW OPE AMP

5 6 2 3 VCC 9 10 12 13 14 4 AVDD2.7V 1 7
P DRIVE A P DRIVE B
VM3 11 VM4 12 VC 20 16 1 DVDD2.7V
IC1611 VDD BH9972KN SHIFT LENS DRIVER IC
IN1
IN2 15
EN1 19 EN2 17
EXTAF RXD EXTAF TINTE EXTAF AD EXTAF TXD EXTAF SCK EXTAF READ EN EXTAF CLK EXTAF CLK0 EXTAF CS
1 2 3 4
AO1 AO2 AO3 AO4
CSB 10 CLK 11
P PWM Y PWM I PSV Y SENS P SENS DA1 CS DA1/DA2/CG SCLK DA1/DA2/CG SO
IC1612 BH2228FV D/A CONVERTER
DI 12
TO AUTO FOCUS ASS'Y
1 2 4 9 10 12 14 15 16 8 13
CN1700 MISO /TINTE AFAD MOSI SCLK READ AFCLK CLK0 CSAF VCC VCC
6 2 5
NC2 NC1
VDD
AVDD2.7V
DA TREEL DA SREEL DA CFG
TO SERVO SECTION MAIN PCB
AVDD 3.2V ND HALL OUT(+) ND HALL OUT() ND HALL IN(+) ND HALL IN() H6 HALL1OUT F5 HALL1+OUT H7 HALL1+IN G6 HALL1IN D8 OUT2B GYRIN1 E5 GYRIN2 G4 Y GY OUT P GY OUT Y GY OUT P GY OUT TO CVF SECTION MAIN PCB DAC5 OUT F1
TO LENS UNIT
15 14 13 12 10 11 4 17 18 6 8 7 9 26 25 27 28 29 30 31 20 23 22 1 24 21 3 2
CN1200 ND HALL OUT ND HALL IN ND HALL OUT+ ND HALL IN+ ND DRIVE+ ND DRIVE FOCUS TARG FOCUS DRIVE+ FOCUS DRIVE ZOOM B ZOOM B+ ZOOM A ZOOM A+ IG DRIVE+ IG DRIVE IG HALL IN+ IG HALL OUT+ IG HALL IN IG HALL OUT IG HALL OUT ZOOM SENS L TEMP ZOOM LED FOCUS VCC L TEMP 2.7V ZOOM VCC FOCUS ANAB FOCUS ANAA
ND DRIVE+
FOCUS TARG FOCUS DRIVE+ FOCUS DRIVE ZOOM B ZOOM +B ZOOM A ZOOM +A
D3 DAC3 OUT B8 OUT3 C8 OUT3B A4 OUT5B A3 OUT5 A5 OUT4B A6 OUT4 DI D4 CLK A2 LD B4 IN1 E2 IN3 C5 AIF/DA SO AIF/DA SCLK DA LOAD PWM IRIS PWM VCM PWM ND PWM ZA PWM ZB AIF/DA SO AIF/DA SCLK DA LOAD PWM IRIS PWM VCM PWM ND PWM ZA PWM ZB ND ENC I SW Y GYRO P GYRO I ENC Z PSV ND F PSV IRIS CL I ENC ND ENC Z RES SW L TEMP LED RET TO RECORDER SECTION-2 MAIN PCB
IC1200 BH9970GU LENS DRIVER

IG DRIVE+ IG DRIVE IG HALL IN(+) AVDD 2.7V IG HALL OUT(+) IG HALL IN() IG HALL OUT() C1 OUT1B B1 OUT1 E6 HALL2+IN G7 HALL2+OUT D6 HALL2IN F7 HALL2OUT
IN2 G8 IN4 C4 IN5 B3
AELEV1 G5 EN4.5 B6 EN2.3 C6 IRIS CONT E3 GAIN1.2 G2
ND ENC Z PSV ND F PSV IRIS CL I SW Y GYRO P GYRO I ENC
Q1700 P5V B5 VM4.5 B7 VM3 D7 VM2 B2 VM1 TO RECORDER SECTION-2 MAIN PCB MR ENC AD1 MR ENC AD2 AVDD2.7V F8 VC
GYRLEV1 H4 GYRLEV2 F4 AELEV2 F6
01
Mar. 2007
CANON INC. 2007
SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION

MAIN PCB(4/10)
TO RECORDER SECTION-1 MAIN PCB BARRSW LED BARRMO OUT3 BARRMO OUT4 BARRMO OUT1 BARRMO OUT2 BARRSW OPEN BARRSW CLOSE RMC IN WHITE LED
CPU BUS SIGNAL

Q101
USB SIGNAL
L TEMP I ENC LED RET IRIS CL Z RES SW Z PSV ND F PSV ND ENC
HV20 E
TO CAMERA SECTION-3 MAIN PCB A4 ND ENC R7 B13 P7 AFEG XCS AFEB XCS AFER XCS A9 B11 A3 V11 G17 V6 TG XRST AFE TXD MPX XRST AFE SCK CCD TEMP CAM ON N8 TG XCS N2 TG TXD N3 TG SCK ND F PSV IRIS CL Z PSV LED RET I ENC
U2 BARRSW EN A10 DIRECTPRINT LED 9 OUT3 10 OUT4 8 7 IN1 4 M5 B MO CONT1 2 3 N5 B MO CONT2 P5 B MO ENABLE R2 BARRSW OPEN P3 BARRSW CLOSE K18 RMC PULSE IN TO CARD, REAR PCB, HDMI FPC SECTION REAR PCB 2 CN101 EJECT SW Q105 Q102 Q106 D13 VIDEO LIGHT ON B12 EJECT SW TO SERVO SECTION MAIN PCB CAS IN MIC ON MIC1 MIC2 MIC3 HPD TX SDA(I2C) TX SCL(I2C) MON SENSE HDMI RST ST EFCHG ST TMG ON ST VDHGL(0) 2 OI1 CONT1 7 3 1 5 TX SDA(I2C) TX SCL(I2C) TX SDA(I2C) TX SCL(I2C) TX SDA(I2C) TX SCL(I2C)
C3 V12 A12 T11 D11 F11 B4 Z RES SW L TEMP
IC104 LB1935T IN2 OUT1 MOTOR DRIVER IC

OUT2 ENA
P.AE/GREEN SW K1 START/STOP SW P1 VTR POW SW D16 CAM POW SW E16 KEY AD1 B5
IC108 TC7PA19AFE CHIP SELECT DECODER

3 6
MPX XCS1 J16
USB XINT0 L5 MACS CAM MODE T6 VTOM CS K14 MTOV EN D10 VTOM DATA R9 MTOV DATA T9 1 4 USB XCS
D6 CASSETTEMEMORY A/D0 T4 MIC ON Q110 E14 CAS IN P4 HDMI HPD
CAM ON XERD M XEWRL M CCD TEMP AFE SCK AFE TXD AFEG XCS AFEB XCS AFER XCS TG XCS TG SCK TG TXD TG XRST MPX XRST MPX XCS MPX RDY EDATA M DATA0 to 15 EADDR M ADD0 to 15
OI2
IC109 CONT2 TC7W66FK ANALOG SWITCH IO1

IO2
C6 CASSETTEMEMORY A/D1 B6 CASSETTEMEMORY A/D2 V4 TX SDA(I2C) U4 TX SCL(I2C) L6 MON SENSE D12 HDMI RST
VTOM SCK P9 NTSC XPAL E13 FCH 0 E17
EADDR M ADD22
RDY H16 MACS XCS2 F15 MACS XCS3 F16 MACS XCS1 G15 MACS XCS0 H18 XERD M XEWRU M XEWRL M MTOV EN VTOM DATA MTOV DATA VTOM SCK NTSC XPAL FCH 0 VTOM CS MACS CAM MODE USB XCS USB XINT0 VTR POW SW CAM POW SW EDATA M DATA0 to 15 EADDR M ADD0 to 5 XRESET TX SDA(I2C) TX SCL(I2C)
D+ D VBUS
C12 ACCESS & CHARGE LED M4 COM POW LED T10 EXTAF TXD P10 EXTAF SCK Q103 M18 EXTAF READ EN U1 EXTAF CLK L18 EXTAF CLK0 F18 EXTAF CS R10 EXTAF RXD R1 EXTAF TINTE E7 EXTAF AD U11 PHOTO SW N1 H PHOTO SW C16 T/C POW SW C4 ZOOM AD VTR UNREG AVDD2.7V DVDD2.7V C14 VTR ON Q107 P5.15V D101 Q104 AVDD2.7V LENS LOGIC D14 ST EFCHG(0) B3 ST VDHGL(0) T12 ST TMG ON J3 CARD DET A5 KEY AD0 B9 FR FM END
TO CARD, REAR PCB, HDMI FPC ASS'Y SECTION CARD PCB CN104
3 5 7 13 18 10 26 28 30 14 17 19 12 20 21 23 15 8 11 25 2 16 24
CN102 D+ D VBUS ACCESS & CHARGE LED CAM POW LED P.AE/GREEN SW SP+ SP CARD DET START/STOP SW VTR POW SW CAM POW SW KEY AD1 KEY AD0 PHOTO SW H PHOTO SW T/C POW SW ZOOM AD VTR UNREG AVDD2.7V LI RESET DVDD2.7V LI POW2
IC103 TC7SZ08AFE AND GATE

1
IC105 TC7WZ00FK NAND GATE

1 7 2 EADDR M ADD0 R12 EADDR M ADD1 P11 EADDR M ADD2 T13 EADDR M ADD3 V13 6 3 5
4 2
IC107 TC7WZ02FK NOR GATE

1 7 2 6 EADDR M ADD23
IC100 TMP19A64C1DXBG CCM MI-COM
EADDR M ADD4 U13 EADDR M ADD5 N11 EADDR M ADD6 R13 EADDR M ADD7 V14 EADDR M ADD8 T14 EADDR M ADD9 P12 EADDR M ADD10 V15 EADDR M ADD11 U15 EADDR M ADD12 P13 EADDR M ADD13 R14 EADDR M ADD14 V16 EADDR M ADD15 U16 EADDR M ADD16 T15 EADDR M ADD17 V17 EADDR M ADD18 T16 EADDR M ADD19 U17 EADDR M ADD20 R15 EADDR M ADD21 P14 EADDR M ADD22 N14 EDATA M DATA0 T17 EDATA M DATA1 T18 EDATA M DATA2 P15 EDATA M DATA3 R16 EDATA M DATA4 R17 EDATA M DATA5 R18 EDATA M DATA6 M13 EDATA M DATA7 M14 EDATA M DATA8 P16 EDATA M DATA9 P18 EDATA M DATA10 P17 EDATA M DATA11 L13 EDATA M DATA12 N18 EDATA M DATA13 N15 EDATA M DATA14 N17 EDATA M DATA15 L14 FM XCS L17 FM XRST R11
IC106 TC7SZ86FU EX-OR GATE

1 4 2
3 5
IC102 TC7SZ86FU EX-OR GATE

1 4 2 EADDR M ADD24
EXTAF CLK EXTAF CLK0 EXTAF TXD EXTAF RXD EXTAF SCK EXTAF CS EXTAF AD EXTAF READ EN EXTAF TINTE
TO POWER SUPPLY SECTION MAIN PCB
LI POW VBATT VTR ON B RESET CCM RESET E3+LI E3V E1.4V DC V A/D A/D I BATT A/D IC3201 CSL IC3201 VTOM CLK IC3201 MTOV DATA IC3201 VTOM DATA DC V DET B E3DET CHG CTL1 CHG CTL2 DC J DET VTR ON SUB SUB SCP OFF CAM MINUS1.2 ON BATT TEMP LCD BL ON
Q100
C15 FIELD INDEX0 D100 E3V A15 MACS FREEZE REQ B14 EXT IN INFO M16 SHOE ON E9 ST VDHGL(1) C5 KEY AD2 A6 KEY AD3 B8 KEY AD4 P6 MF CW SW U3 MF CCW SW G14 B RESET G1 CCM RESET U10 DC V DET A8 DC V A/D D7 A/D I A7 BATT A/D T3 IC3201 CSL C SYNC LCD/EEP SO LCD/EEP SCLK LCD EEP CS V LCD EEP SIN V LCD CS LCD ON VF R LCD VF B LCD VF G LCD PANEL BT SW PANEL OPEN SW CHG CTL2 CHG CTL1
EDATA M DATA0 EDATA M DATA1 EDATA M DATA2 EDATA M DATA3 EDATA M DATA4 EDATA M DATA5 EDATA M DATA6 EDATA M DATA7 EDATA M DATA8 EDATA M DATA9 EDATA M DATA10 EDATA M DATA11 EDATA M DATA12 EDATA M DATA13 EDATA M DATA14 EDATA M DATA15
E2 DQ0 H2 DQ1 E3 DQ2 H3 DQ3 H4 DQ4 E4 DQ5 H5 DQ6 E5 DQ7 F2 DQ8 G2 DQ9 F3 DQ10 G3 DQ11 F4 DQ12 G5 DQ13 F5 DQ14 G6 DQ15
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19
E1 D1 C1 A1 B1 D2 C2 A2 B5 A5 C5 D5 B6 A6 C6 D6 E6 B2 C3 D4
EADDR M ADD0 EADDR M ADD1 EADDR M ADD2 EADDR M ADD3 EADDR M ADD4 EADDR M ADD5 EADDR M ADD6 EADDR M ADD7 EADDR M ADD8 EADDR M ADD9 EADDR M ADD10 EADDR M ADD11 EADDR M ADD12 EADDR M ADD13 EADDR M ADD14 EADDR M ADD15 EADDR M ADD16 EADDR M ADD17 EADDR M ADD18 EADDR M ADD19 EADDR M ADD20 E3V
E3+LI E3V E1.4V
MACS RDY MACS XCS EDATA M DATA0 to 15 EADDR M ADD0 to 24 XEWRL M XEWRU M XERD M MACS XINT0 MACS XINT1 MACS XRST MACS TDO
XRESET SP + SP
SHOE ON ST VDHGL(1) DIRECTPRINT LED KEY AD2 KEY AD3 KEY AD4 MF CW SW MF CCW SW C SYNC LCD/EEP SCLK LCD/EEP SO LED EEP CS V LCD/EEP SIN V LCD CS LCD ON VF R LCD VF B LCD VF G LCD PANEL BT SW PANEL OPEN SW VF G EVF VF R EVF VF B EVF EVF SEN EVF 3V ON EVF 5V ON
CSYNC O SO(1)/PIO W6 C LKON/PIO SCLK(1)/PIO SCS(4)/PIO SI(1)/PIO SCS(5)/PIO ROFS/PIO
M26 F13 E13 F12 E12 C11 N23
T7 IC3201 VTOM CLK V7 IC3201 MTOV DATA U7 IC3201 VTOM DATA E11 CHG CTL G13 DC J DET F14 B E3DET E12 CHG CTL1 A13 VTR ON SUB PCST0(EJTAG) PCST1(EJTAG) PCST2(EJTAG) PCST3(EJTAG) PCST4(EJTAG) TPCO(EJTAG) TRST(EJTAG) DCLK(EJTAG) DINT(EJTAG) B15 SUB SCP OFF B10 CAM MINUS1.2 ON C7 BATT TEMP XRESET K15 MACS XINT1 K16 MACS XINT0 TMS(EJTAG) TDO(EJTAG) TCK(EJTAG)
FM XCS FM XRST XEWRU M XERD M
F1 CE B4 RST A4 WE G1 OE
IC101 SST39VF1601-70-4I-B3KE FLASH
NC3 D3
VF G EVF VF R EVF VF B EVF EVF SEN EVF 3V ON EVF 5V ON
V27 Y22 V26 E11 U2 W5
VF G1 VF R1 VF B1 SCS(0)/PIO SDR CKE/PIO EADDR(B)/PIO
VF G2 V25 EDACK/PIO EXT RDY2/PI AE5 AC3
V10 MACS XRST
TDI(EJTAG)
EJE(EJTAG)
IC2301(1/3) MB87Q1211BGL-GE1 VIC HDV
VF R2 U27 VF B2 W23
XERD M H17 XEWRU M H15 XEWRL M H14
C10 M1 G2 CDATA(4)/PIO CDATA(3)/PIO SCS(6)/PIO SCS(7)/PIO F25 D27 F9 A9 FR FM END FIELD INDEX0 MACS FREEZE REQ EXT IN INFO
F2
H6
E3
D1
F3
D3
C1
E2
D2
C2
E4
E1
CN100 E3V TPCO PCST0 PCST2 PCST4 EJE DINT TCK TMS TDO TDI TRST PCST1 PCST3 DCLK CCM RESET DEBCLK DEBUD DEBDD XDEBEN DEBCLK DEBUD DEBDD XDEBEN
A9 A4 A1 A2 A3 B9 A8 A7 B7 A6 B6 A5 B2 B3 B4 B8 B12 A11 B11 A10
NC
01
Mar. 2007
CANON INC. 2007
SERVO SECTION
HV20 E
DRUM SERVO SIGNAL
MAIN PCB(5/10)
CAPSTAN SERVO SIGNAL
D.W1 D1 D.W2 E1 D.V1 B1 D.V2 C2 D.U1 A1 D.U2 B2 D.COM D5 D.PGIN A6 D.FGPGIN+ C6 D.FGIN D6 C.HW H6 CFG DPG DFG A4 C.FGSMT B7 D.PGSMT C7 D.FGSMT D4 D.EC D10 L.FBR C.HW+ G6 C.HU+ K5 CN303 C H W W+ C H+ U+ U V+ V CFG2 CFG1 UCOIL UCOIL WCOIL WCOIL VCOIL VCOIL CFG VCC CN302 W W V V U U COIL COM DPG DFG SENS COM 10 11 3 4 1 2 9 6 5 7
DMC III
DRUM MOTOR
PG FG
IC300 BD6303GVW MOTOR DRIVER IC
C.HU
J5
C.HV+ H5 C.HV G5 C.FGIN C5
C3 D.PS J3 C.PS J2 C.FBR K2 C.EC J7 R.OUT1 TO RECORDER SECTION-3 MAIN PCB J8 R.OUT2 CFG DPG DFG DERR LMO FRBL LMO FRBH DRUM ON CAP ON CAP FRBL CAP FRBH CERR TREEL SREEL DA CFG DEW AD MSW AD TAPE TOP TAPE END TAPE LED REC PROOF REEL LED CONT DA TREEL DA SREEL
C.FGIN+ B5 C.U1 G2 C.U2 G3 C.V1 H1 C.V2 H2 C.W1 G4 C.W2 H3 L.REV1 F3 L.REV2 F2 L.FWD1 E2 AVDD2.7V
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 1 18 17 16 15 14 13 2
CAPSTAN MOTOR
FG
LOADING MOTOR
DEW SENSOR
CN301 LOAD() LOAD() LOAD(+) LOAD(+) DEW+ MSW SENS MSW VCC MSW VSS
H8 R.PS J10 R.H G10 TAPE LED G9 LED K
L.FWD2 E3 R.IN1 H7 R.IN+1 K8 R.IN2 K9 R.IN+2 G7 AVDD2.7V
6 7 1 2 8 5 4 3
MODE SW
TAPE END SENSOR TAPE TOP SENSOR
BOT DET EOT DET Q301 Q301 AVDD2.7V
P5V
Q300 MIC ON CAS IN MIC1 MIC2 MIC3
AVDD2.7V
CN300 BOT E BOT C EOT E EOT C LED A LED K REC PRF MIC3 MIC2 MIC1 C IN TIN TIN+ TOUT TOUT+ SIN SIN+ SOUT SOUT+
1 2 20 21 14 15 5 4 6 7 12 8 10 9 11 16 18 17 19
SAFETY SW
MIC
CASSETTE IN SW
FG
TAKE UP REEL
FG
SUPPLY REEL
01
Mar. 2007
CANON INC. 2007
RECORDER SECTION-1
MAIN PCB(6/10)
TO JACK PCB, FRONT COVER ASS'Y SECTION JACK PCB CN501 34 32 30 28 26 33 12 13 14 15 16 11 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 17 18 19 20 40 42 43 44 37 39 36 CN2800 D DET D ID1 PR PB Y D ID3 P5V ST UNREG ST UNREG ST UNREG ST UNREG STROBE3V BARRMO OUT2(A) BARRMO OUT1(A) BARRMO OUT4(B) BARRMO OUT3(B) BARRSW CLOSE BARRSW LED BARRSW OPEN WHITE LED RMC IN ST TMG ON ST TMG ST EFCHG ST VDHGL AV R EXT L ADV/EXT MIC R EXT P DET AV JACK DET AV L/HP L V I/O/HP R
ANALOG IMAGE SIGNAL
ANALOG AUDIO SIGNAL
DIGITAL IMAGE SIGNAL
DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL
CPU BUS SIGNAL
DIGITAL (IMAGE+AUDIO SIGNAL)
HV20 E
A6
D DETECT
AHDATA COD(0) AHDATA COD(1)
R8 U9 T9 P9 U10 R10 P10 U11 R5 U6 T6 P6 U7 T7 R7 P7 U12 U8
AH DATA0 AH DATA1 AH DATA2 AH DATA3 AH DATA4 AH DATA5 AH DATA6 AH DATA7 BH DATA0 BH DATA1 BH DATA2 BH DATA3 BH DATA4 BH DATA5 BH DATA6 BH DATA7
AH DATA0 AH DATA1 AH DATA2 AH DATA3 AH DATA4 AH DATA5 AH DATA6 AH DATA7 BH DATA0 BH DATA1 BH DATA2 BH DATA3 BH DATA4 BH DATA5 BH DATA6 BH DATA7
AC3 AC4 AB1 AB2 AB3 AB4 AA3 AA4 AG4 AF1 AF2 AF3 AF4 AE2 AE3 AE4 AA1 W1
AHDATA0 AHDATA1 AHDATA2 AHDATA3 AHDATA4 AHDATA5 AHDATA6 AHDATA7 BHDATA0 BHDATA1 BHDATA2 BHDATA3 BHDATA4 BHDATA5 BHDATA6 BHDATA7 HDVCLK VCLK TSD0 TSD1 TSD2 TSD3 TSD4 TSD5 TSD6 G25 G24 F24 F25 F26 F27 E24 E26 D27 D26 D24 E27 B1 C3 C2 D3 D2 E3 AE16 AD16 TSD0 TSD1 TSD2 TSD3 TSD4 TSD5 TSD6 TSD7 TSCLK TDIR TSSYNC TSVALID WCK LRCK AUD1 MACS TO VIC/TRI AUD2 MACS TO VIC/TRI AUD1 TRIP TO VIC AUD2 TRIP TO VIC E DATA0 E DATA1 E DATA2 E DATA3 E DATA4 E DATA5 E DATA6 E DATA7 E DATA8 E DATA9 E DATA10 E DATA11 E DATA12 E DATA13 E DATA14 E DATA15 E ADD0 E ADD1 E ADD2 E ADD3 E ADD4 E ADD5 E ADD6 E ADD7 E ADD8 E ADD9 E ADD10 E ADD11 E ADD12 E ADD13 E ADD14 E ADD15 E ADD16 E ADD17 E ADD18 STDATA0 STDATA1 STDATA2 STDATA3 STDATA4 STDATA5 STDATA6 STDATA7 STCLK STEN STSTART STEND STREQ C27 A26 B26 B25 C25 A24 B24 C23 A23 C22 D22 D21 D23 ST DATA0 ST DATA1 ST DATA2 ST DATA3 ST DATA4 ST DATA5 ST DATA6 ST DATA7 ST CLK ST EN ST START ST END ST REQ ST DATA0 to 7 ST CLK ST EN ST START ST END ST REQ TSD0 to 7 TSCLK TDIR TSSYNC TSVALID AUD1 MACS TO VIC/TRI AUD2 MACS TO VIC/TRI AUD1 TRIP TO VIC AUD2 TRIP TO VIC E DATA0 to 15 E ADD0 to 18 XERD XEWRU XEWRL BASIL CS TRIPLETS CS TRIPLETS RDY TRIPLETS INT1 TRIPLETS INT2 TRIPLETS TDO TRIPLETS BASIL XRESET TRST TCK TMS LINKS TDO BASIL TDO WCK LRCK AUD1 VIC TO AIF TO RECORDER SECTION-3 MAIN PCB
Q2808
AHDATA COD(2) C16 D ID1/GPO(18)/MONI(2) AHDATA COD(3) AHDATA COD(4) AHDATA COD(5) AHDATA COD(6) A9 C11 C8 PR PB BHDATA COD(0) Y BHDATA COD(1) BHDATA COD(2)
P5.15V
IC2802 MAX4382EEE COMPONENT DRIVER

10 OUTB 11 INB 16 OUTC 15 INC DISABLEA 7 6 OUTA INA DISABLEC DISABLEB 1 2 3 VIC A DATA0 VIC A DATA1 VIC A DATA2 VIC A DATA3 VIC A DATA4 Q2800 VIC A DATA5 VIC A DATA6 VIC A DATA7 VIC B DATA0 VIC B DATA1 Q2809 Q2810 VIC B DATA2 VIC B DATA3 VIC B DATA4 VIC B DATA5 VIC B DATA6 VIC B DATA7 VIC OSD DATA0 VIC OSD DATA1 VIC OSD DATA2 VIC OSD DATA3 27M CCLK VIC HD DOTCLK VIC OSD VD VIC OSD HD INB+ 12 INC+ 14 INA+ 5
ST UNREG STROBE3V
AHDATA COD(7)
T12 R12 P12 U13 T13 R13 U14 P14 N15 M17 M16 M15 M14 L17 L16 L14 R17 R16 R15 P17 N17 P16 U16 T15 U17 K17 B5 C5 D5 A4 B4 C4 A3 A2
ADATA VIC(0) ADATA VIC(1) ADATA VIC(2) ADATA VIC(3) ADATA VIC(4) ADATA VIC(5) ADATA VIC(6) ADATA VIC(7) BDATA VIC(0) BDATA VIC(1) BDATA VIC(2) BDATA VIC(3) BDATA VIC(4) BDATA VIC(5) BDATA VIC(6) BDATA VIC(7)
BHDATA COD(3) BHDATA COD(4) BHDATA COD(5) BHDATA COD(6) BHDATA COD(7) CLK CODEC VCLK CODEC
TO CAMERA SECTION-2 MAIN PCB TO RECORDER SECTION-3 MAIN PCB
V I/O/HP R AV JACK DET AV L/HP L AV R EXT L ADV/EXT MIC R EXT P DET BARRMO OUT2 BARRMO OUT1 BARRMO OUT4 BARRMO OUT3 BARRSW CLOSE BARRSW LED BARRSW OPEN WHITE LED RMC IN ST TMG ON ST EFCHG ST VDHGL(0) ST TMG
XERD XEWRU XEWRL TRIPLETS CS XERD R2 P3 T1 XERD XEWRL BASIL CS TRIPLETS RDY TRIPLETS INT1 TRIPLETS INT2
Y26 AA25 AA24 W25 AB26 AA27 AA26
XERD XEWRU XEWRL XECS ERDY HIRQOUT XERROR
TSD7 TSCLK TDIR TSSYNC TSVALID WCK LRCK AUD1 I AUD2 I
OSD DATA(0) OSD DATA(1) OSD DATA(2) OSD DATA(3) VCLK IN CCLK IN DOT CLK VD HD VSYNC ADATA CAM(0) ADATA CAM(1) ADATA CAM(2) ADATA CAM(3) ADATA CAM(4) ADATA CAM(5) ADATA CAM(6) ADATA CAM(7)
XEWRL XECS
IC2800 MBG119APBS-ME1 HDV CODEC IC

XRESET U3 T3 U4 T5 U5 P5 TRIPLETS BASIL XRESET TRST TCK TMS BASIL TDO TRIPLETS TDO TRIPLETS BASIL XRESET TRST TCK TMS LINKS TDO TRIPLETS TDO Y27 AB25 W24 V24 V25 T24 XRESET TRST TCK TMS TDI TDO
AUD1 O AUD2 O EDATA00 EDATA01
V I/O/HP R LET CONT WIDE CONT MUTE D VIC A DATA0 to 7 VIC B DATA0 to 7 VIC OSD DATA0 to 3 27M CCLK VIC HD DOTCLK VIC OSD VD VIC OSD HD VIC HD VD CAM A DATA0 to 7 CAM B DATA0 to 7 CLK MACS VCLK MACS XHD MACS
VIC HD VD CAM A DATA0 CAM A DATA1 CAM A DATA2 CAM A DATA3 CAM A DATA4 CAM A DATA5 CAM A DATA6 CAM A DATA7
IC2801 MB87S1192BGL-GE1 BASEBAND IC
TRST TCK TMS TDO TDI
EDATA02 AG18 EDATA03 EDATA04 AE18 AD18
EDATA05 AG19 EDATA06 EDATA07 AF19 AE19
EDATA08 AG20 EDATA09 EDATA10 EDATA11 AF20 AE21 AD21
CAM B DATA0 CAM B DATA1 CAM B DATA2 CAM B DATA3
D1 D2 D3 E1 E2 E3 F1 F4 C1 G1 B2 F16 F15 F14 E16 E15 D17 D15 D14 B15 A14 B14 C14 B13 C13 D13 A12 E17
BDATA CAM(0) BDATA CAM(1) BDATA CAM(2) BDATA CAM(3) BDATA CAM(4) BDATA CAM(5) BDATA CAM(6) BDATA CAM(7) CLK CAM VCLK CAM XHD CAM DATA Y(0)/GPO(0) DATA Y(1)/GPO(1) DATA Y(2)/GPO(2) DATA Y(3)/GPO(3) DATA Y(4)/GPO(4) DATA Y(5)/GPO(5) DATA Y(6)/GPO(6) DATA Y(7)/GPO(7) DATA CRCB(0)/GPO(8) DATA CRCB(1)/GPO(9) DATA CRCB(2)/GPO(10) DATA CRCB(3)/GPO(11) DATA CRCB(4)/GPO(12) DATA CRCB(5)/GPO(13) DATA CRCB(6)/GPO(14) DATA CRCB(7)/GPO(15) CLK SDI EADDER(0) EADDER(1) EADDER(2) EADDER(3) EADDER(4) EADDER(5) N2 N3 N4 P1 P4 R1 E ADD0 E ADD1 E ADD2 E ADD3 E ADD4 E ADD5 EDATA(0) EDATA(1) EDATA(2) EDATA(3) EDATA(4) EDATA(5) EDATA(6) EDATA(7) EDATA(8) EDATA(9) EDATA(10) EDATA(11) EDATA(12) EDATA(13) EDATA(14) EDATA(15) G3 H1 H2 H4 J1 J3 J4 K1 K2 K3 L1 L2 L3 L4 M4 N1 E DATA0 E DATA1 E DATA2 E DATA3 E DATA4 E DATA5 E DATA6 E DATA7 E DATA8 E DATA9 E DATA10 E DATA11 E DATA12 E DATA13 E DATA14 E DATA15
EDATA12 AG22 EDATA13 EDATA14 EDATA15 AF22 AE22 AD22
TO CARD, REAR PCB, HDMI FPC ASS'Y SECTION HDMI FPC ASS'Y CN10
18 17 15 14 12 11 9 8 6 5 2 4 3
CN2830 D2+ D2 D1+ D1 D0+ D0 CLOCK+ CLOCK SCL SDA HPD +5V +5V HDMI5V
D2+ D2 D1+ D1 D0+ D0 CLOCK+ CLOCK SCL SDA HPD
36 35 33 32 30 29 27 26 20 19 18 17
TX2P TX2N TX1P TX1N TX0P TX0N TXCP TXCN DSCL DSDA HPD INTR VA0(Y0) VA1(Y1) VA2(Y2) 79 78 77 76 67 65 64 63 75 70 69 68 56 55 54 53 66 DATA Y0 DATA Y1 DATA Y2 DATA Y3 DATA Y4 DATA Y5 DATA Y6 DATA Y7 DATA CRCB0 DATA CRCB1 DATA CRCB2 DATA CRCB3 DATA CRCB4 DATA CRCB5 DATA CRCB6 DATA CRCB7 CLK SDI
CAM B DATA4 CAM B DATA5 CAM B DATA6 CAM B DATA7 CLK MACS VCLK MACS XHD MACS DATA Y0 DATA Y1 DATA Y2 DATA Y3 DATA Y4 DATA Y5 DATA Y6 DATA Y7 DATA CRCB0 DATA CRCB1 DATA CRCB2 DATA CRCB3 DATA CRCB4 DATA CRCB5 DATA CRCB6 DATA CRCB7 CLK SDI
EADDR00 AG23 EADDR01 EADDR02 EADDR03 AF23 AE23 AD23
EADDR04 AG24 EADDR05 EADDR06 EADDR07 EADDR08 EADDR09 EADDR10 EADDR11 EADDR12 EADDR13 EADDR14 EADDR15 EADDR16 EADDR17 EADDR18 AF24 AD24 AF25 AE25 AD25 AF26 AE26 AD26 AF27 AE27 AC27 AC25 AC24 AB27
HPD MON SENSE TX SDA(I2C) TX SCL(I2C) HDMI RST
IC2830 TDA9983BHW/8/C1 HDMI IC
VA3(Y3) VB0(Y4) VB1(Y5) VB2(Y6) VB3(Y7) VA4(CB0.CR0)
44 43 42
CSDA CSCL RST AP1 BCLK
AUD1 VIC TO AIF
1D
11 2CK
IC2833 TC74VHC74FT PRESET AND CLEAR
2Q 1CK
9 3
10 12
VA5(CB1.CR1) VA6(CB2.CR2) VA7(CB3.CR3) VC0(CB4.CR4) VC1(CB5.CR5)
6 4
1 3
VC2(CB6.CR6) VC3(CB7.CR7) PCLK IN 11 LRCK WCK AP0
IC2831 TC7PA04FU DUAL INVERTER IC
01
Mar. 2007
CANON INC. 2007
RECORDER SECTION-2
IEEE 1394 SIGNAL ANALOG IMAGE SIGNAL ANALOG AUDIO SIGNAL DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL CPU BUS SIGNAL
HV20 E
MAIN PCB(7/10)
LINE IN D25 CDATA(1)/PIO AG22 AGC PWM Q2104 AA26 VRH1 Q2103 AA23 BYPASS Q2102 75 TO RECORDER SECTION-1 MAIN PCB V I/O/HP R AV JACK DET AV R AV L/HP L Y26 COMP FB AG27 COMP O AF24 CLAMP PWM AE26 COMP IN B11 SCS(3)/PIO HP MUTE HP ON TO CAMERA SECTION-3 MAIN PCB PWM ZB PWM ZA PWM VCM PWM IRIS PWM ND Y PWM P PWM P GYRO Y GYRO P SENS Y SENS ND ENC I ENC MR ENC AD2 MR ENC AD1 I SW DA LOAD DA1 CS I PSV DA1/DA2/CG SO DA1/DA2/CG SCLK AIF/DA SCLK AIF/DA SO PWM ZB PWM ZA PWM VCM PWM IRIS Q805 AVDD2.7V PWM ND Y PWM P PWM Q853 Q806 P GYRO Y GYRO P SENS Y SENS ND ENC Q802 Q852 Q801 I ENC MR ENC AD2 MR ENC AD1 T25 T26 T23 R27 R23 R25 R22 P27 P22 J26 F23 J27 LREQ/PIO D(1)/PIO PWM(0)/PIO PWM(1)/PIO PWM(3)/PIO PWM(4)/PIO PWM(5)/PIO PWM(6)/PIO FROM RECORDER SECTION-3 IC2301 (3/3) PWM(7)/PIO AIN(13) AIN(12) AIN(11) EADDR(0) L6 M1 M2 M3 M5 M6 N1 N2 N3 N5 N6 P2 P3
IC2301 (2/3) MB87Q1211BGL-GE1 VIC HDV
P5 R1 R2 R3 R5 R6 T2 T3 T5 EADDR(22) T6
G22 AIN(10) EXT RDY42/PIO H22 K27 K25 J22 AIN(6) SCS(10)/PIO B13 SCLK(0)/PIO AF6 EDREQ/PIO SCS(8)/PIO AIN(5) AIN(3) AIN(2) C12 SO(0)/PIO
EXT RDY41/PIO
EXT RDY1/PI
BGRNTX/PIO
XECS(6)/PIO
B10 SCLK(2)/PIO
A11 SCS(1)/PIO
SDLSEL/PIO
XECS(2)/PIO
AA3 XEINT2/PI
C10 SO(2)/PIO
A12 SI(0)/PIO
BRQ/PIO
D(2)/PIO
D(3)/PIO
D(4)/PIO
D(5)/PIO
D(6)/PIO
D(7)/PIO
AB3 XRESET
U22 LPS/PIO
E19 AUD1 O
P25 SOUND
A17 AUD1 I
B15 AMCK
C15 LRCK
AG7 TRST
AG1 TMS
AF7 TDO
AG2 TCK
F16
W3
XECS(0)
XEWRU
XEWRL
PIO(9)
PIO(8)
PIO(5)
PIO(6)
XERD
W1
G1
G2
G3
G5
G6
C8
H1
C2
D3
U3
H6
A8
A1
B2
E3
K1
K2
K3
K5
Y6
V1
Y5
Y2
V6
V5
K6
F6
F3
F2
F1
L1
L2
REC MUTE
AIF/DA SO
EXT DET
XILWRE
A MUTE
ICLK
IDIR
XTS
XIV
SP + SP
Q855 Q750 E DATA0 Q851 E DATA1 E DATA2 E DATA3 E DATA4 E2 DQ0 H2 E3 H3 H4 E4 H5 E5 F2 G2 F3 G3 F4 G5 F5 G6 DQ15 A3 BES F1 BEF LINKS CS LINKS INT G1 OE B4 RST A0 E1 D1 C1 A1 B1 D2 C2 A2 B5 A5 C5 E ADD0 E ADD1 E ADD2 E ADD3 E ADD4 E ADD5 E ADD6 E ADD7 E ADD8 E ADD9 E ADD10 E ADD11 E ADD12 E ADD13 E ADD14 E ADD15 E ADD16 E ADD17 E ADD18 E ADD19 E ADD20
TO CVF SECTION MAIN PCB TO RECORDER SECTION-1 MAIN PCB
ADV/EXTMIC R ADV MIC L
ADV/EXTMIC R EXT L AUD1 VIC TO AIF CN701 INT MIC R INT MIC L
LINKS INT
LINKS CS
DA LOAD
Q854 I SW
AUD1 AIF TO VIC
AUD1 VIC TO AIF
DA1/DA2/CG SO
SOUND
AIF/DA SCLK
EXT P DET TSD0 to 7 TSCLK TDIR TSSYNC TSVALID
DA1/DA2/CG SCLK
DA1 CS
XPDI
AIF CS
I PSB
ID0
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
ID5
ID6
ID7
E DATA5 B1 B2 A1 A2 B3 AA4.6V P5V AA2.7V Q803 B4 A4 32 HVDD 19 47 10 8 34 41 40 45 42 LRCK AMCK WCK 3 4 5 6 7 AUDIO I/F CONTROLLER ALC1 HPF FIL1 FIL2 EQ FIL3 MIC POWER PRE AMP 28 +2db to 2db 24db +12db 0db OFFSET CANCEL HPF OFFSET CANCEL HPF 26 ADC 44 39 PRE AMP 27 MIXER & DEM 25 DAC OPGA MIX 36 E DATA0 E DATA1 31 HP AMP LINE OUT 29 35 21 ALC2 SPK AMP 20 13 AIF CS 14 AIF/DA SCLK 16 REC MUTE 17 XPDI 23 24 2 SOUND SP + SP E DATA2 E DATA3 E DATA4 E DATA5 E DATA6 E DATA7 E DATA8 E DATA9 E DATA10 E DATA11 E DATA12 E DATA13 E DATA14 E DATA15 J1 J2 K1 L2 K2 E12 E13 E11 F12 F11 G12 G13 G11 H11 J12 J13 J11 K13 L11 L13 L12 XTPB TPB XTPA TPBIAS TPA EDATA0 EDATA1 EDATA2 EDATA3 EDATA4 EDATA5 EDATA6 EDATA7 EDATA8 EDATA9 EDATA10 EDATA11 EDATA12 EDATA13 EDATA14 EDATA15 XEWRU EADDR0 EADDR1 EADDR2 EADDR3 EADDR4 EADDR5 EADDR6 M7 N13 N12 N11 M11 M10 N10 M9 E ADD0 E ADD1 E ADD2 E ADD3 E ADD4 E ADD5 E ADD6 5 3 6 XRESET XERD M8 L8 1 7 2 Q804 B5 A5 C5 A6 A7 TSD0 TSD1 TSD2 TSD3 TSD4 TSD5 TSD6 TSD7 TSVALID TSSYNC TSCLK TDIR ID0 ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4 ID5 ID6 ID7 IDIR ICLK XIV XILWRE XTS XECS XINT C7 B8 A8 C8 B10 A10 C11 A11 B13 C12 A13 B12 A12 N7 L7 E DATA6 E DATA7 E DATA8 E DATA9 E DATA10 E DATA11 E DATA12 E DATA13 E DATA14 E DATA15
TO TOP COVER ASS'Y
4 2
IC2310 SST34HF324G-70-4E-L3KE FLASH/SRAM
D5 B6 A6 C6 D6 E6 B2 C3 D4 A20 D3
SVDD MVDD TVDD DVDD AVDD
OVF DETECT
AUD1 VIC TO AIF AUD1 AIF TO VIC
IC2303 MB87M4771BGL-GE1 1394 IC
TDI TCK TMS TRST TDO
M2 N2 M3 N3 L3
IC2308 TC7SZ08AFE AND GATE

1 4 2
A4 WE C4 LBS F6 UBS
IC801 AK4567 AIF4

AIF/DA SO CONTROL REGISTER I/F
IC2309 TC7WZ08FK AND GATE

E ADD0 to 2 E DATA8 to 15 XERD XEWRU TRST TMS TCK TO CAMERA SECTION-2 MAIN PCB
12
L5
J1
J2
J3
J5
J6
EDATA(15)
WCK
EDATA(0)
XRESET E ADD0 to 18 E DATA0 to 15 XERD XEWRU XEWRL TRST TMS TCK LINKS TDO
HDV/DV JACK
1 2 3 4
CN2400 XTPB TPB XTPA TPA
01
Mar. 2007
CANON INC. 2007
RECORDER SECTION-3
MAIN PCB(8/10)
VIC A DATA0
HV20 E
A18 C19 B19 A19 C20 B20 A20 C21 B25 A27 E21 E22 E26 E27 F21 F22 C23 B23 A23 C24 A25 A24 A21 B22 A22 F26 D1 E2 D2 C3 B3 A3 C4 B4 A4 A6 B6 C6 A5 G26 G27 U6 AF21 ADATA(0) ADATA(1) ADATA(2) ADATA(3) ADATA(4) ADATA(5) ADATA(6) ADATA(7) BDATA(0) BDATA(1) BDATA(2) BDATA(3) BDATA(4) BDATA(5) BDATA(6) BDATA(7) OSD DATA(0) OSD DATA(1) OSD DATA(2) OSD DATA(3) VCLK CCLK HD DOTCLK OSD VD OSD HD HD VD STDATA(0) STDATA(1) STDATA(2) STDATA(3) STDATA(4) STDATA(5) STDATA(6) STDATA(7) STCLK STEN STSTART STEND STREQ CDATA(6)/PIO CDATA(7)/PIO EADDR(24)/PIO PIO(4) MDATA(0) AG13 MDATA(1) MDATA(2) MDATA(3) MDATA(4) AF13 AE13 AC13 AB13 M DATA0 M DATA1 M DATA2 M DATA3 M DATA4 M DATA5 M DATA6 M DATA7 M DATA8 M DATA9 M DATA10 M DATA11 M DATA12 M DATA13 M DATA14 M DATA15 M ADD0 M ADD1 M ADD2 M ADD3 M ADD4 M ADD5 M ADD6 M ADD7 M ADD8 M ADD9 M ADD10 M ADD11 M ADD12 M ADD13 DQML XWE XCAS XRAS XCS MCKE MCLK DQMU XDEBEN DEBUD DEBDD DEBCLK MTOV EN VTOM DATA MTOV DATA VTOM SCK NTSC XPAL VTOM CS MACS CAM MODE SHOE ID2 SHOE ID1 HA3V HA4.6V VTR UNREG CN2900 V I/O/HP R VTR POW SW CAM POW SW FCH 0 EVF HD EVF COM DC EVF COM AC MIC2 MIC3 EVF B EVF G EVF R SWP PBRF VTR UNREG B1 B3 B5 B6 B4 A1 A3 A5 A6 A8 A9 A10 B8 B10 A4 A8 DQ0 B9 DQ1 B8 DQ2 C9 DQ3 C8 DQ4 D9 DQ5 D8 DQ6 E9 DQ7 E1 DQ8 D2 DQ9 D1 DQ10 C2 DQ11 C1 DQ12 B2 DQ13 B1 DQ14 A2 DQ15 H7 A0 H8 A1 J8 A2 J7 A3 J3 A4 J2 A5 H3 A6 H2 A7 H1 A8 G3 A9 H9 A10 G2 A11 G8 BA1 G7 BA0 E8 LDQM F9 WE F7 CAS F8 RAS G9 CS F3 CKE F2 CLK F1 UDQM VDD1 A9 VDDQ1 A7 VDDQ2 B3 VDD2 E7 VDD3 J9 VDDQ3 C7 VDDQ4 D3 SHOE ID2 SHOE ID1 EVF HD EVF B EVF G EVF R EVF COM DC EVF COM AC V I/O/HP R TO CVF SECTION MAIN PCB SDRAM 1.8V DVDD1.4V USB 3.2V USB XINT0 XERD M XEWRU M XEWRL M USB XCS K10 VBUS H10 DM J10 DP K8 RST N K7 INT N A3 RD N B2 WR1 N A2 WR0 N A1 CS N A4 DACK1 N H5 VIFA1 E3 VIFA2 C6 VIFB1 F8 VIFB2 H9 AFED33V1 K9 AFED33V2 J4 AFED33V3 J7 AFEA15V F3 VDD1 C5 VDD2 E8 VDD3 D0 B1 D1/AD1 C1 D2/AD2 C2 D3/AD3 D1 D4/AD4 D2 D5/AD5 D3 D6/AD6 E1 D7 E2 D8 F1 EDATA M DATA 0 EDATA M DATA 1 EDATA M DATA 2 EDATA M DATA 3 EDATA M DATA 4 EDATA M DATA 5 EDATA M DATA 6 EDATA M DATA 7 EDATA M DATA 8 EDATA M DATA 9 EDATA M DATA 10 EDATA M DATA 11 EDATA M DATA 12 EDATA M DATA 13 EDATA M DATA 14 EDATA M DATA 15 EADDR M ADD 0 EADDR M ADD 1 EADDR M ADD 2 EADDR M ADD 3 EADDR M ADD 4 EADDR M ADD 5 XDEBEN DEBUD DEBDD DEBCLK MTOV EN MTOV DATA NTSC XPAL VTOM DATA VTOM SCK VTOM CS MACS CAM MODE FCH 0 VTR POW SW CAM POW SW TX SDA(I2C) TX SCL(I2C) TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN PCB EDATA M DATA0 to 15 EADDR M ADD0 to 5 XRESET USB XINT0 USB XCS XERD M XEWRU M XEWRL M D+ D VBUS TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN PCB VIC A DATA1 VIC A DATA2
DRUM SERVO SIGNAL CAPSTAN SERVO SIGNAL DIGITAL IMAGE SIGNAL DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL DIGITAL (IMAGE+AUDIO SIGNAL) USB SIGNAL CPU BUS SIGNAL ANALOG IMAGE SIGNAL
VIC A DATA3 VIC A DATA4 VIC A DATA5 VIC A DATA6 VIC A DATA7 VIC B DATA0 VIC B DATA1 VIC B DATA2 VIC B DATA3 VIC B DATA4 VIC B DATA5 VIC B DATA6 VIC A DATA0 to 7 VIC B DATA0 to 7 VIC OSD DATA0 to 3 27M CCLK VIC HD DOTCLK VIC OSD VD VIC OSD HD VIC HD VD ST DATA0 to 7 ST CLK ST EN ST START ST END ST REQ WIDE CONT LET CONT MUTE D TRIPLETS BASIL XRESET TRIPLETS CS BASIL CS TRIPLETS RDY TRIPLETS INT1 TRIPLETS INT2 AUD1 MACS TO VIC/TRI AUD2 MACS TO VIC/TRI AUD1 TRIP TO VIC AUD2 TRIP TO VIC VIC B DATA7 VIC OSD DATA0 VIC OSD DATA1 VIC OSD DATA2 VIC OSD DATA3 27M CCLK VIC HD DOTCLK VIC OSD VD VIC OSD HD VIC HD VD ST DATA0 ST DATA1 ST DATA2 ST DATA3 ST DATA4 ST DATA5 ST DATA6 ST DATA7 ST CLK ST EN ST START ST END ST REQ WIDE CONT LET CONT
MDATA(5) AG14 MDATA(6) MDATA(7) MDATA(8) AF14 AE14 AC14
MDATA(9) AG15 MDATA(10) MDATA(11) MDATA(12) AF15 AE15 AC15
MDATA(13) AG16 MDATA(14) MDATA(15) ADDR(0) ADDR(1) ADDR(2) ADDR(3) ADDR(4) ADDR(5) AF16 AE16 AC23 AC22 AC21 AB21 AC20 AE20
IC2307 K4M64163PK-BG75 SDRAM
DVDD2.7V
IC3500 RBA01013LG USB IC
D9 F2 D10 G1 D11 G2 D12 G3 D13 H1 D14 H2 D15 J2 A1 K2 A2 J6 A3 K6 A4 J5 A5 K5 A6/ALE K3
ADDR(6) AG20 ADDR(7) ADDR(8) ADDR(9) ADDR(10) AB19 AC19 AE19 AF19
ADDR(11) AG19 ADDR(12) ADDR(13) DQML AC18 AE18 AC16
XWE AG17 XCAS XRAS XCS CKE AF17 AE17 AB17 AC17
IC2301(3/3) MB87Q1211BGL-GE1 VIC HDV
MCLK AG18 DQMU XDEBEN DEBUD DEBDD DEBCLK XEINT50/PIO TX/PIO RX/PIO AB16 AD27 AE24 AE23 AF23 AA1 E5 B7 A7 AF5 AG3 Y3 G23 K26
AUD1 MACS TO VIC/TRI AUD2 MACS TO VIC/TRI AUD1 VIC TO MACS AUD2 VIC TO MACS MACS CS MACS INT
MUTE D
IC2306 TC7SZ32AFE OR GATE

1 4 2
TRIPLETS BASIL XRESET
TRIPLETS CS 0 TRIPLETS CS GATE
AB2 AB1
XECS(40)/PIO XSDR CAS/PIO
UAT CLKO/PIO XECS(5)/PIO XEINT54/PIO XECS(44)/PIO AIN(8) AIN(7)
SERVICE CONNECTOR
BASIL CS TRIPLETS RDY TRIPLETS INT1 TRIPLETS INT2 AUD1 MACS TO VIC/TRI AUD2 MACS TO VIC/TRI AUD1 TRIP TO VIC AUD2 TRIP TO VIC AUD1 VIC TO MACS X2300 AUD2 VIC TO MACS
Y1 AC2 AA2 AD2 C17 E18 F18 B16 E17 C16 B14
XECS(45)/PIO EXT RDY40/PIO XEINT52/PIO XEINT53/PIO AUD3 I/PIO AUD4 I/PIO AUD5 I/PIO AUD6 I/PIO AUD3 O/PIO AUD4 O/PIO VCLK O XRDAT PB H AE9 AB8 AC7 AB6 AC6 AG10 AE10 AC9 XRCLK RCLK RAFC RAPC RAGC EQFC EQ CONT GDL CONT GDH CONT 17 2 21 Q2000 1 6 PB ON 34 REC H UTIL SWP(5) RDAT AC8 AF12 AF9 32 35 36 REC CONT REC ON
38
IC2000 LD502W VRP2
46 45 43 42
H1A H1B H2A H2B CN2000 H1A H1B H2A H2B
TO SERVO SECTION MAIN PCB
1 REC PROOF REEL LED CONT TAPE TOP TAPE END TREEL SREEL TAPE LED LMO FRBL LMO FRBH CAP ON MSW AD DEW AD DERR CERR CFG DPG DFG CAP FRBL CAP FRBH DRUM ON
6 5 3 2
CH-1 HEAD
CH-2 HEAD
DRUM UNIT
VIDEO SIGNAL
R26 PWM(2)/PIO
TO RECORDER SECTION-2 IC2301 (2/3) TO RECORDER SECTION-2 IC2301 (2/3)
VRH7 VRL7 PBRF SWP XRCLK
MACS CS MACS INT
AUDIO SIGNAL
AA5 AE2 XECS(1)/PIO XEINT0/PI
DERR CERR CFG DPG DFG REEL LED CONT DRUM ON
M22 N26 M23 N22 N25 AG6
PWMD PWMC CFG DPG CDATA(2)/PIO DFG XFB IOW/PIO
RCLK
UTIL SWP(4) AG12 RAPC AF2
RAGC AC10 UTIL SWP(3) AC11 CAPDIR/PIO XFB RD/PIO UTIL SWP(2) RFGS/PI RFGT/PI TCLK/PI AIN(15) AG21 PIO(2) AIN(14) PIO(1) AIN(9) AIN(4) AE11
GCA EPH GDL EQ VCO
SI(2)/PIO
AG25 PIO(3)
UTIL SWP(1) AB10 UTIL SWP(0) AF11
AF25
M25
D26
AF3
H25
H23
A10
E23
F15
L22
L23
J25
29 TAPE TOP TAPE END MSW AD DEW AD TREEL SREEL
30
13
11
12
28
25
26
22
23
REC PROOF
LMO FRBL
LMO FRBH
CAP FRBL
CAP FRBH
TAPE LED
CAP ON
GDH CONT
GDL CONT
EQ CONT
01
Mar. 2007
XRCLK
RAGC
EQFC
RAPC
RAFC
RCLK
CANON INC. 2007
POWER SUPPLY SECTION

Power from Battery Power from DC JACK
D3203
HV20 E
FU500 FU1900 FU3203 FU3202 FU3200 FU3201 28 ST UNREG SHOE UNREG DRUM CAP POW VTR UNREG
MAIN PCB (9/10)
Battery charge
OSC C5 MACS1.2V 1.2V (CH1) LPF PWM Logic CTL DRV A7 B7 SEL1 C4 J1 1.5V (CH2) DVDD1.4V AVDD1.4V LPF TRIPLETS1.2V VICX1.2V AVDD1.2V
CN3200
B4 AVDD2 N6 PVDD6 A FU1800 Q1802 2 5 4 M6 PVDD6 B L6 AVDD1 H1 PVDD2 A 4 Q1801 5 6 7 8 3 2 1 1 3 H2 PVDD2 B N7 PVDD5 A M7 PVDD5 B M1 PVDD3 A L1 PVDD3 B A8 PVDD1 A B8 PVDD1 B A9 PVDD4 A B9 PVDD4 B L11 AVDD3 M12 +INC11 L12 INC11 N11 OUT11 Q1800 F11 CS2 A/D I CHG CTL1 CHG CTL2 VBATT B RESET E3+LI CCM RESET E3V PWM Logic CTL DRV N2 M2 J11 OUTC11 K11 CHRG CTL1 M11 CHRG CTL2 A2 VBATT F3 RST OUT2 A4 VOUT2 C1 CS OUT1 B5 VOUT3 L4 /RST B E3DET PWM Logic CTL CH4 C6 1.8V (CH4) DVDD1.8V SDRAM1.8V HDMI1.8V DRV A10 B10 CH3 K1 2.8V (CH3) LPF LPF PWM Logic CTL CH2 CH1
DC JACK
DC J DET DC V DET DC V A/D A/D I CHG CTL1 CHG CTL2 VBATT B RESET E3+LI CCM RESET E3V B E3DET IC3201 CSL IC3201 VTOM CLK IC3201 MTOV DATA IC3201 VTOM DATA E1.4V LI POW CAM MINUS1.2 ON VTR ON LCD BL ON SUB SCP OFF VTR ON SUB BATT A/D BATT TEMP
DRV
G1 G2 DVDD2.7V AVDD2.7V EVF2.7V AA2.7V
TO BATTERY TERMINAL
3 5 4 2 1
CN3201 BATT TEMP BATT + BATT + BATT BATT
D2 CS OUT2 L5 LD J3 CLK G3 DIN H3 DOUT A3 VOUT1 A5 VOUT4 G11 CTL7 PWM Logic CTL CH5 J2 1.8V (CH5) AFE1.8V MACS SDRAM1.8V
IC3201 CSL IC3201 VTOM CLK IC3201 MTOV DATA IC3201 VTOM DATA E1.4V LI POW LCD CAM ON
DRV
N8 M8
LCD BL VFB
K2 4.9V (CH6) LPF PWM Logic CTL DRV N5 M5 5 M10 CTL10 (CH10 ON/OFF) D11 E11 VIN P5V LCD5V
POWER ON/OFF CTL C7 CTL CH16
CH6
IC3261 NJM2877F3-46 VOUT 4.6V REGULATOR
AA4.6V 4 AVDD4.6V HA4.6V
L2 CS1
VCC
FB2 31 INE2 30 Q3320 3.0V (SUB 2) OUT2 22 2 AVDD3V 5 4 LCD3.0V
C2
SW CTL1
IC3200 MB44C014 MAIN POWER IC

PWM Logic CTL
CH7
VREF1 L7 F12 G13 F13 C13 D3280 1.35V (CH8) 5 VIN
24 VCCO
DRV

CONT 1
AVDD3.2V HDMI3.2V
D1
Logic CTL
CTL
B3 HA3V USB3.2V E1.4V STROBE3V Q3450
IC3300 MB44A127PV3-G-E1 SUB POWER IC

FB1 26 INE1 27
SW OUT
B13 C9
SENS1.35V
DVDD 1.4V B12 A12 TO CIRCUIT PROTECTION PWM Logic CTL
C11 CH8 DRV D3290 C10 CH9 E13 DRV D13 D12 LCD BL (CH9) LCD BL POW G12
Q3310 5.35V (SUB 1) OUT1 23 2
CAM5.3V 5 4 P5.15V P5V D3200
C12
H11 CTL9 (CH9 ON/OFF) L9 VB L8 DVDD1
PWM Logic CTL
3 5
IC3310 VIN NJM2881F05 VOUT 5.0V REGULATOR
L10 PVDD10 4 HDMI5V E3V C4 SEL1 VOUT10 N10 LCD8.5V (CH10) LCD 8.5V
01
Mar. 2007
CANON INC. 2007
CVF SECTION
HV20 E
CVF PCB
CVF FPC
MAIN PCB(10/10)
R/R-Y 45 LCD (CVF) 1 3 4 5 6 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 CN4102 VDD VSSG HST HCK2 HCK1 NRW REF XSTB VST VCK ENB PCG BLUE RED GREEN PSIG COM CN4101 EVF VDD EVF VSSG EVF HST EVF HCK2 EVF HCK1 EVF NRW EVF REF EVF XSTB EVF VST EVF VCK EVF ENB EVF PCG EVF B EVF R EVF G EVF PSIG EVF COM AC AVDD2.7V P GY OUT Y GY OUT 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 1 2 4 CN102 1 AVDD2.7V 2 P GY OUT 4 Y GY OUT 6 EVF COM AC(COM) 7 PSIG 8 EVF G 9 EVF R 10 EVF B 11 PCG 12 ENB 13 VCK 14 VST 15 XSTB 16 REF 17 NRW 18 HCK1 19 HCK2 20 HST 21 VSSG 22 EVF 8.5V(VDD) SHOE UNREG CN100 AVDD2.7V P GY OUT Y GY OUT EVF COM AC EVF PSIG EVF G EVF R EVF B EVF PCG EVF ENB EVF VCK EVF VST EVF XSTB EVF REF EVF NRW EVF HCK1 EVF HCK2 EVF HST EVF VSSG EVF 8.5V SHOE UNREG SW SHOE UNREG SW SHOE UNREG SW SHOE UNREG SW SHOE ID1 ST VDHGL(1) ST TMG 1 SHOE ID2 ADV MIC L ADV/EXT MIC R KEY AD2 DIRECTPRINT LED P5V P5V EVF BL2.7V EVF BL2.7V 20 21 23 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 1 2 3 4 9 10 11 12 14 15 17 18 19 43 44 45 CN1501 25 EVF COM AC 37 EVF HCK1 38 EVF HCK2 27 EVF G 28 EVF R 29 EVF B 30 EVF PCG 26 EVF PSIG 31 EVF ENB 32 EVF VCK 33 EVF VST 34 EVF XSTB 35 EVF REF 39 EVF HST 36 EVF NRW 41 EVF8.5V(EVF VDD) 40 EVF VSSG 44 EVF BL2.7V 45 EVF BL2.7V 20 AVDD2.7V 43 P5V 19 P5V 4 SHOE UNREG SW 3 SHOE UNREG SW 2 SHOE UNREG SW 1 SHOE UNREG SW 21 P GY OUT 23 Y GY OUT 18 DIRECTPRINT LED 17 KEY AD2 15 ADV/EXT MIC R 14 ADV MIC L 12 SHOE ID2 11 ST TMG 1 10 ST VDHGL(1) 9 SHOE ID1 38 COMDC 39 COM OUT EVF HCK1 EVF HCK2 EVF G EVF R EVF B EVF PCG EVF PSIG EVF ENB EVF VCK EVF VST ZD1501 AVDD2.7V P5V EVF XSTB EVF REF EVF HST EVF NRW 14 HCK1 15 HCK2 35 G OUT 34 R OUT 33 B OUT 19 PCG 37 PSIG OUT 22 EN 23 VCK 24 VST 20 XSTB 42 REF 17 HST 16 NRW XCLR 10 G/Y 44 B/B-Y 46 HDO 27 SYNC IN 47 SCK SDAT SEN 7 8 6
VF R EVF VF G EVF VF B EVF EVF HD C SYNC LCD/EEP SCLK LCD/EEP SO EVF SEN
AVDD 2.7V
VCC
OUT
IC1691 ENC-03RC-02 P SENSOR GYRO

AVDD 2.7V AVDD2.7V 3 VCC OUT 4
IC1501 CXM3017TQ CVF DRIVER
IC1692 ENC-03RD-02 Y SENSOR GYRO
EVF2.7V Q1503 SWITCH
Q1504 26 POF LCD5V Q1502
SW100 DISP
LCD8.5V 41 DA OUT 36 VCC2 SHOE UNREG Q1503 SWITCH Q1901
VCC1-2 43 VCC1-1 5 Q1501
EVF G EVF R EVF B EVF COM AC EVF COM DC VF R EVF VF G EVF VF B EVF EVF HD C SYNC LCD/EEP SCLK LCD/EEP SO EVF SEN EVF 3V ON EVF 5V ON SHOE ON SHOE ID1 SHOE ID2 DIRECTPRINT LED MF CCW SW MF CW SW PANEL BT SW LCD ON LCD EEP SIN V LCD EEP CS V LCD CS VF G LCD VF B LCD VF R LCD KEY AD2 KEY AD3 KEY AD4 ST VDHGL(1) PANEL OPEN SW P GY OUT Y GY OUT ST TMG 1 ADV MIC L ADV/EXT MIC R
TO CAMERA SECTION-3 MAIN PCB TO RECORDER SECTION-2 MAIN PCB TO POWER SUPPLY SECTION MAIN PCB
VDD1 18 VDD2 29
LCD BL VFB
SW101 DIRECTPRINT
LED100 ZD100 ZD4101
LED4101 Q4101
LCD8.5V LCD3.0V LCD BL POW
CN900 LCD/EEP SCLK LCD/EEP SO C SYNC NMF CCW SW KEY AD3 NMF CW SW PANEL BT SW LCD BL VFB LCD ON LCD EEP SIN V LCD EEP CS V LCD CS LCD5V LCD3.0V PANEL B PANEL R PANEL G KEY AD3 KEY AD4 PANEL OPEN SW LCD8.5V LCD3.0V LCD BL POW LCD BL POW
13 14 21 1 2 3 5 9 11 12 15 16 19 20 24 25 26 28 29 31 17 18 6 7
TO LCD PCB, FOCUS DIAL, LCD FPC ASS'Y SECTION LCD FPC ASS'Y CN1
01
Mar. 2007
CANON INC. 2007
LCD PCB, FOCUS DIAL, LCD FPC ASS'Y SECTION

DATA COMMUNICATION
HV20 E
LCD PCB
Q901
Q902
ZD4201
WP4201
BACK LIGHT LED
LCD FPC ASS'Y

LCD3.0V 5 VIN LCD8.5V TO CVF SECTION MAIN PCB CN900 6 7 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 24 25 26 28 29 1 2 3 5 31 CN1 LCD BL POW LCD BL POW LCD BL VFB LCD ON LCD EEP SIN V LCD/EEP SCLK LCD/EEP SO LCD EEP CS V LCD CS LCD8.5V LCD3.0V LCD5V LCD3.0V C SYNC PANEL B PANEL R PANEL G KEY AD3 KEY AD4 MF CCW SW KEY AD3 MF CW SW PANEL BT SW PANEL OPEN SW CN2 LCD BL POW LCD PL POW LCD BL VFB LCD ON LCD EEP SIN V LCD/EEP SCLK LCD/EEP SO LCD EEP CS V LCD CS LCD8.5V LCD3.0V LCD5V LCD3.0V C SYNK PANEL B PANEL R PANEL G KEY AD3 KEY AD4 27 26 24 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 9 7 5 3 2 14 16 13 15 22 26 27 24 7 5 9 17 18 19 20 21 12 3 2 CN901 LCD5V LCD8.5V LCD3.0V LCD3.0V LCD ON LCD BL POW LCD BL POW LCD BL VFB PANEL R PANEL G PANEL B LCD CS LCD EEP CS V LCD/EEP SO LCD/EEP SCLK LCD EEP SIN V C SYNC KEY AD3 KEY AD4 LCD3.0V

CONT 1
18 VDD1 5 VCC1-1
29 VDD2
36 VCC2
43 VCC1-2 10 XCLR 45 R/R-Y 44 G/Y B OUT LCS ECS SO CLK SO E CS CLK SO SO 1 2 3 4 CS SK DI DO 46 B/B-Y 33 CN902 RED GREEN BLUE VST VCK EN DWN XSTBY PCG HST NRW HCK2 HCK1 RGT REF LCD COM AC(COM1) CS COM2 PSIG VDD VSSG ZD901 4 5 3 22 21 20 19 14 13 12 9 8 7 2 11 24 23 1 6 18 15 R OUT 34 G OUT 35
VST 24 VCK 23
IC902 BR9010RFV-W EEPROM
VCC
LCD3.0V
IC901 CXM3017TQ LCD DRIVER
EN
22
DWN 21 XSTB 20 PCG 19
SW1 PANEL BT SW L CS CLK SW2 PANEL OPEN SW SO 6 7 8 SEN SCK SDAT
HST 17 NRW 16 HCK2 15 HCK1 14 RGT 13 REF 42 47 SYNC IN COM OUT 39 COMDC POF PSIG OUT 38 37
LCD UNIT LCD
26
LCD8.5V Q903 CN50 REW FF PLAY STOP
5 4 3 2
TO LCD KEY ASS'Y
FOCUS DIAL ASS'Y

SW52 CN3 MF CCW SW KEY AD3 MF CW SW 5 4 3 5 4 3 CN1 MF CCW SW KEY AD3 MF CW SW
E2
E1 MF DIAL
ZD50
SW50 MF SW
SW51 FA SW
01
Mar. 2007
CANON INC. 2007
JACK PCB, FRONT COVER ASS'Y SECTION

ANALOG IMAGE SIGNAL ANALOG AUDIO SIGNAL
HV20 E
JACK PCB
T501 CN502 XE(+) XE() 2 1 TO XENON
CP501
15 VBAT
CP502
6 I PEAK
SW1
CN503 T(+) T()
2 1
TO TRIGER COIL
3 VCC
SW2
10 CHG
Q502
IC501 TPS65560RGT DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL

1
IC502 TC7SET08FU(F) CMOS IC

4
TO RECORDER SECTION-1 MAIN PCB CN2800
33 29 30 31 32 34 26 27 28 25 6 9 8 5 3 2 1 19 17 15 13 12 11 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CN501 P5V ST UNREG ST UNREG ST UNREG ST UNREG STROBE3V ST EFCHG ST TMG ST TMG ON ST VDHGL AV L/HP L V I/O/HP R AV JACK DET AV R EXT L ADV/EXT MIC R EXT P DET Y PB PR D ID1 D ID3 D DET RMC IN WHITE LED BARRSW OPEN BARRSW LED BARRSW CLOSE BARRMO OUT3(B) BARRMO OUT4(B) BARRMO OUT1(A) BARRMO OUT2(A)
2 P5V Q501
Q503
CN10
AV JACK
CN701
MIC JACK
CN20 Y PB PR DET1 DET3 D DET
1 3 5 6 7 9
COMPONENT JACK
FRONT COVER ASS'Y

CN100 RMC IN WHITE LED BARRSW OPEN BAR LED CL BAR LED OP BARRSW CLOSE BARRMO OUT3(B) BARRMO OUT4(B) BARRMO OUT1(A) BARRMO OUT2(A) P5V 3 2 7 6 8 5 11 9 10 12 1 11 9 10 12 8 7 6 5 2 1 3 CN100 BARRMO OUT3 BARRMO OUT4 BARRMO OUT1 BARRMO OUT2 BAR LED OP BARRSW OPEN BAR LED CL BARRSW CLOSE WHITE LED P5V RMC IN PS100 PS101 CP100 CP102 CP101 CP103
P5V
LED10
RU100 P5V RMC 2 1 VCC V0
REMOTE CONTROLER
01
Mar. 2007
CANON INC. 2007
CARD,REAR PCB, HDMI FPC ASS'Y SECTION

USB SIGNAL
HV20 E
CARD PCB
CN103 SP + SP 19 17 2 3 6 7 9 12 14 15 33 25 22 24 26 27 28 30 31 35 37 20 29 38 40 42 32 34 43 21 CN104 SP + SP CARD DAT2 CARD DAT3 CARD CMD DVDD2.7V CARD CLK CARD DAT0 CARD DAT1 CARD DET KEY AD1 KEY AD0 H PHOTO SW PHOTO SW CAM POW SW CAM POW LED VTR POW SW T/C POW SW START STOP SW P.AE/GREEN SW ZOOM AD AVDD2.7V DVDD2.7V VBUS D D+ ACCESS & CHARGE LED VTR UNREG LI RESET LI POW2 LED100 2 1
SPEAKER
CN101 DAT2 CD/DAT3 CMD VDD CLK DAT0 DAT1 CARD DET
TO CAMERA SECTION-2 MAIN PCB CN102
9 1 2 4 5 7 8 12
miniSD CARD
TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN PCB CN102
SW100
CN100 KEY AD0 C KEY AD0 L KEY AD0 R KEY AD1 FUNC KEY AD1 D KEY AD1 U H PHOTO SW PHOTO SW CAM POW SW CAM POW LED VTR POW SW TAPE/CARD SW START/STOP SW P.AE/GREEN SW ZOOM AD AVDD2.7V DVDD2.7V
16 15 18 11 17 20 6 5 4 14 3 1 12 10 8 7 13
TO CASSETTE COVER ASS'Y
CN102 VBUS D D+
1 2 3
USB JACK
REAR PCB
TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN PCB CN101 SW100 EJECT SW
HDMI FPC ASS'Y

2 5 6 8 9 11 12 14 15 17 18 3 4 CN10 HPD SDA SCL CLOCK CLOCK+ D0 D0+ D1 D1+ D2 D2+ +5V +5V CN15 HOT PLUG DETECT SDA SCL TMDS CLOCK TMDS CLOCK+ TMDS DATA0 TMDS DATA0+ TMDS DATA1 TMDS DATA1+ TMDS DATA2 TMDS DATA2+ +5V POWER 19 16 15 12 10 9 7 6 4 3 1 18
HDMI JACK
TO RECORDER SECTION-1 MAIN PCB CN2830
01
Mar. 2007
CANON INC. 2007
R2:CONFIDENTIAL Video Product
HV20 E
No. D16-2016, D16-2015 Digital Video Camera
iPAL
c CANON INC. 2007
Canon Inc. Digital Imaging Products Service & Quality Assurance Dept. First Edition : Mar. 2007 First Print : Mar. 2007
CAUTION
1. Especially critical parts in the power circuit block should not be replaced with other parts. Critical parts are marked with in this electrical parts list. 2. For continued protection against risk of fire, replace FU3203 only with same TYPE : 49401.5, 1.5A32V FUSE, replace FU500, FU1900, FU3200, FU3201, FU3202 only with same TYPE : 494001, 1.0A-32V FUSE MANUFACTURER : LITTELFUSE. 3. For continued protection against risk of product damage or personal injury, replace FU1800 only with same TYPE : 49401.5, 1.5A-32V FUSE MANUFACTURER : LITTELFUSE.
HV20 E PARTS CATALOG
Casing Parts Section-1
134 1 13 12 11
1 10 4 72 1 2 13 8 1 52 Front Cover Unit 3 6 34 32 7 12 R-LCD Unit 14 1 72 9
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
PART NO.
XA1-7170-307 XA9-1772-000 XA1-7170-407 DA3-5743-000 XA9-1706-000 DA3-5736-000 XA4-9170-557 XA9-0610-000 DA3-5842-000 DA3-5787-000 DG3-1861-000 DA3-2796-000 XA1-3170-507 DA3-5856-000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
F F F B F B F C B C B B F B
QTY
13 1 7 1 2 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 4 1
DESCRIPTION
SCREW SCREW SCREW COVER, JACK SCREW COVER, BOTTOM SCREW SCREW EYECUP PLATE, HEATSINK, TOP COVER ASSY, TOP SHOE, ACCESSORY SCREW LABEL, CAUTION
REMARKS
NEW NEW
NEW NEW NEW
NEW

1 13 1 14 6 8 7 Recorder Unit 1 12 1 7 10
a
12
12
11 3 33 1 2 Camera Unit
a
12
12
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
PART NO.
XA1-7170-307 DG3-1849-000 XA9-1708-000 DG3-1845-000 DA3-5733-000 DA3-5732-000 XA4-9170-407 XA4-9170-557 DA3-5759-000 DG3-1839-000 WK1-5164-000 DH2-5671-000 DA3-5739-000 DA3-5741-000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
F C F B C C F F C C C C B B
QTY
17 1 4 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
SCREW FLASH ASSY SCREW COVER ASSY, CASSETTE SPRING, HOOK HOOK, CASSETTE SCREW SCREW PLATE, HEATSINK PCB ASSY, CARD BATTERY, LITHIUM <2ND> FPC, CARD COVER, REAR COVER, JACK, REAR
REMARKS
NEW NEW NEW NEW
NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW

18
17
1 16
142 13 15 14 3
12
13
7 5 6
12
10
11
12
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
PART NO.
XA9-1663-000 DG3-1836-000 DH9-3062-000 DA3-5869-000 DA3-5745-000 XA1-7170-307 DH2-5670-000 DY1-9104-000 DA3-5868-000 DA3-5858-000 DA3-5845-000 DG3-1842-000 DH2-5675-000 XA9-1167-000 DA3-1933-000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
F C C C C F C C C C C C C F C C C C
QTY
8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
SCREW, MACH.,PAN HEAD PCB ASSY, JACK CAPACITOR, AL-EL, 330V 100UF SHIELD, BOTTOM FRAME, BOTTOM SCREW FPC, MAIN-JACK PCB ASSY, MAIN SHIELD, MAIN PCB LABEL, FUSE PLATE, GRAND FPC ASSY, HDMI WIRE, REAR SCREW PLATE, GROUND PCB ASSY, REAR HOLDER ASSY, MAIN RECORDER UNIT, DMC III(H)
REMARKS
NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW
DG3-1840-000 000 DF1-5205-000 000 DY1-8901-000 000
NEW NEW
Front Cover Unit Section
43
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2 3 4
PART NO.
DY1-9110-000 DA3-5814-000 DY1-9111-000 XA4-9170-407 000 000 000 000
CLASS
B C C F
QTY
1 1 1 3
DESCRIPTION
COVER ASSY, FRONT PLATE, GND FOCUS DIAL ASSY SCREW
REMARKS
NEW NEW NEW
R-LCD Unit Section

4 12 1 2 5 112 7 10
3 6
1 8
12 9 13 14 32
LCD Unit
10
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
PART NO.
XA4-9170-407 XA4-9170-557 XA1-7170-407 DA3-5777-000 WR1-5137-000 DH2-5677-000 DA3-5784-000 DA3-5779-000 DA3-5738-000 DA3-5770-000 DA3-5785-000 DA3-5870-000 DA3-5773-000 DA3-5774-000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
F F F B C C C C B B C B B C
QTY
4 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
SCREW SCREW SCREW PLATE, HEATSINK SPEAKER WIRE, SPEAKER SHEET, BLIND WINDOW, LED BASE, TRIPOD COVER, RIGHT CUSHION, LCD CUSHION, LCD, GRAY LID, CARD SHAFT, LID, CARD
REMARKS
NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW
11
LCD Unit Section

14
13
a
10
11 12 9 8 12
a
7 6
4 3 2
*2 8 WG2-5301-000 000 C 1 LCD
12
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
PART NO.
XA1-7170-407 DY1-9108-000 DA3-5766-000 DG3-1838-000 XA1-7170-257 DA3-5767-000 DG3-1671-000 DY1-9008-000 WG2-5301-000 DA3-5764-000 DG3-1846-000 DA3-5768-000 DG3-1850-000 DA3-5769-000 DG3-1843-000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
F B C C F C C C C B C B C B C
QTY
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
SCREW COVER, LCD TOP PLATE, GND, LCD PCB ASSY, LCD SCREW INSULATOR, LCD BACK LIGHT ASSY LCD, SELECTION LCD COVER, LCD, B KEY ASSY, LCD COVER, HINGE, T HINGE ASSY COVER, HINGE, B FPC ASSY, LCD
REMARKS
NEW NEW NEW NEW
*1 *2
NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW
*1 : Screened, dot-free units. *2 : Same quality as the production line.
13
CVF Battety Case Unit Section

21 3 3 22 23
20 25 24
2 1 10 9 8 1 7 6 133 11
19
26
27 28
123 5 14 15 18
33
4 3 16 17
14
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
PART NO.
XA1-7170-307 DG3-1844-000 XA4-9170-507 DG3-1837-000 DA3-5823-000 DA3-5827-000 DA3-5826-000 DA3-3813-000 WG2-5297-000 DA3-5824-000 DA3-5843-000 DA3-2455-000 XA4-9170-357 DH2-5676-000 DA3-5830-000 DA3-5832-000 DA3-5831-000 DA3-5737-000 DA3-5818-000 DA3-5833-000 DG3-0978-000 DA3-5771-000 DA3-5772-000 DA3-5819-000 YN1-3901-000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
F C F C C C C C C C C C F C C C C C C B C C B C C C C C
QTY
2 1 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
SCREW FPC ASSY, CVF SCREW PCB ASSY, CVF REFLECTOR, CVF DIFFUSER, CVF CUSHION, CVF LCD HOLDER, CVF PANEL 2 LCD, CVF HOLDER, PANEL, CVF PLATE, CASE, BATT TERMINAL, BATTERY SCREW WIRE, TERMINAL, BATTERY HOLDER, CASE, BATT SPRING, BATT LOCK KNOB, LOCK, BATT KEY, RESET CASE, CVF, BATT BASE, SHOE CONNECTOR ASSY, AAS KEY, RIGHT, TOP WINDOW, LED, KEY HOLDER, CVF LENS LENS, EYEPIECE KNOB, CVF DIOPTER ABSORBER, CVF KNOB HOLDER, CVF
REMARKS
NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW
NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW
DA3-5821-000 000 DA3-5110-000 000 DA3-5820-000 000
15
Camera Unit Section

7 15 16
13 14
162
1 10 9 8
11
123
Lens Unit 22 3 4
52
16
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PART NO.
DY1-9112-000 XA4-9170-557 DA3-3296-000 DA3-5750-000 XA4-9170-407 DG3-1855-000 XA9-0610-000 DH9-3057-000 DA3-5675-000 DA3-6415-000 DY1-9106-000 XA4-9170-507 DA3-5841-000 DA3-5758-000 DA3-5757-000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
C F C C F C C C C C C F C C C F
QTY
1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 3
DESCRIPTION
AUTO FOCUS ASSY SCREW ABSORBER, LENS HOLDER, LENS SCREW FRAME ASSY, TOP SCREW FILTER, UV ABSORBER, CMOS SENSOR SPACER, LENS CMOS SENSOR ASSY SCREW GASKET, TOP HEATSINK PLATE, HEATSINK, REAR SCREW
REMARKS
NEW
NEW NEW
NEW NEW NEW NEW
XA1-7170-307 000
17
Lens Unit Section

1
(4)
(2)
(3)
(3) (3)
18
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2 3 4
PART NO.
DG3-2115-000 000 YH8-2056-000 000 XA4-9170-407 000 YB1-0405-000 000
CLASS
C C F F
QTY
1 1 4 1
DESCRIPTION
LENS ASSY IG METER ASSY SCREW SCREW
REMARKS
NEW NEW
19
DMC III PARTS CATALOG
Mechanical Chassis Section-1

1 3 9 (10)
33
11
5 6 7 8
20
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
PART NO.
DG1-4506-000 XA1-7140-147 DA2-2138-000 DY1-8610-000 DA2-2139-000 DF1-1703-000 DA2-2116-000 DA2-2115-000 DY1-8501-000 DA3-2130-000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
B C C E C C C C B C C
QTY
1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
COMPARTMENT ASSY, CASSETTE SCREW SCREW DRUM ASSY WASHER IDLER ASSY SPRING, COIL (DRUM) SCREW CHASSIS ASSY, SLIDE COVER, HOUSING LABEL, S CHASSIS
REMARKS
DA1-9903-000 000
21

3 4 9 5 6 7 8 12 6 13 11 10 1 2 1
22
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
PART NO.
DA2-0645-000 DG1-4504-000 DS1-0193-000 DF1-1693-000 DF1-1694-000 DA2-2139-000 DF1-1704-000 DS1-0199-000 DG1-4505-000 DA2-2220-000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
C C C C C C C C C C C C C
QTY
2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
WASHER REEL ASSY, S SPRING, COIL (TENSION) BRAKE ASSY, TENSION RELEASE ASSY, TENSION WASHER BRAKE ASSY, S SPRING, COIL (S BRAKE) REEL ASSY, T LEVER, EJECT BRAKE, MAIN T SPRING, COIL (T BRAKE) REVIEW ARM ASSY
REMARKS
DA2-2238-000 000 DS1-0198-000 000 DF1-1695-000 000
23

(1) (2)2 (4) (6) 23 (5) 3 (8)
(9) (2)2
(14) (7)
15 11 12
13
(10)
24
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
PART NO.
DG1-4502-000 DA2-2261-000 DG1-4497-010 DF1-1687-000 DF1-1688-000 DA2-0780-000 DF1-1686-000 DA2-2259-000 DG1-4503-000 XA1-7140-147 DG3-1545-000 DA2-2139-000 DS1-0192-000 DA2-2128-010 DG1-4501-000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C
QTY
1 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
MOTOR ASSY, LOADING SCREW GUIDE RAIL ASSY ROLLER ASSY, GUIDE S ROLLER ASSY, GUIDE T SCREW DRUM BASE ASSY SCREW MOTOR ASSY, CAPSTAN SCREW ROLLER ASSY, PINCH WASHER SPRING, COIL (PINCH) GEAR, LOADING S CHASSIS ASSY, MAIN
REMARKS
25

1 3
8 4 5 2 6
10
26
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PART NO.
DA2-2191-010 XA1-7140-147 DA2-2196-000 DA2-2197-000 DA2-2190-000 DA2-2140-000 DA2-2188-000 DA2-2139-000 DA2-2195-000 DA2-2192-000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
C C C C C C C C C C
QTY
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
LEVER, CAM SCREW BELT, TIMING GEAR, PULLEY GEAR, CONNECT WASHER GEAR, WHEEL WASHER GEAR, CAPSTAN GUIDE, TENSION CAM
REMARKS
27
Accessory Section-1
CB-2LT/CB-2LTE N.S. (Product available) CA-570 N.S. (Product available)
CB-2LW/CB-2LWE N.S.(Product available)
JAPAN USA EUROPE AUSTRALIA PLUG TYPE CHINA
N.S. (Commercially available.) MSDC-16M
N.S. (Product available) BP-2L13 WL-D87(E)
(5)
28
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2
PART NO.
DY1-8531-000 D82-0643-000 D82-0645-001 WT3-5087-000 CD1-4054-010 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
C C C C C B C
QTY
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
DC CABLE (CA-570) CABLE, AC, EUROPE CABLE, AC, AUSTRALIA CABLE, AC, CHINA COVER, TERMINAL NB-2L WIRELESS CONTROLLER, WL-D87(E) HOLDER, LITHIUM BATTERY
REMARKS
3 4 5
D83-0752-000 000 DY1-8777-000 000
29
Accessory Section-2
N.S. (Product available) WD-H43 2 N.S. (Product available) TL-H43 2
1 N.S. (Product available) FS-43U/43UII
1 DIF-100 N.S. (Product available)
IFC-300PCU N.S. (Product available)
STV-250N N.S. (Product available) SS-900 3
CTC-100/S N.S. (Product available)
30
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2 3
PART NO.
DA3-6849-000 000 DA3-6850-000 000 D81-1470-000 000
CLASS
B B B
QTY
1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
CAP, FRONT, 74.5 CAP, REAR, 49.5 STRAP, SHOULDER SS-900
REMARKS
NEW NEW
31
FUSE Replacement Instruction

CAUTION - FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST RISK OF FIRE, REPLACE FU3203 ONLY WITH SAME TYPE : 49401.5, 1.5A-32V FUSE, REPLACE FU500, FU1900, FU3200, FU3201, FU3202 ONLY WITH SAME TYPE : 494001, 1.0A-32V FUSE MANUFACTURER : LITTELFUSE. - FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST RISK OF PRODUCT DAMAGE OR PERSONAL INJURY, REPLACE FU1800 ONLY WITH SAME TYPE : 49401.5, 1.5A-32V FUSE MANUFACTURER : LITTELFUSE.
MAIN PCB
IC2309 IC1612 IC1613 IC1611
IC109
IC2831 IC2833
IC104
IC3500
IC101 IC105 IC107 IC102 IC108 IC106 IC103
IC100
IC2830
FU3201 FU3200 FU3202
IC1102
IC3300 IC1000 IC3260 IC3261 IC3200
IC1100
IC1200
IC1103
FU1900 FU3203 FU1800 FU500
32
ELECTRICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
MAIN PCB FU500 FU1800 FU1900 FU3200 FU3201 FU3202 FU3203
PART NO.
VD7-2241-001 VD7-2241-501 VD7-2241-001 VD7-2241-001 000 000 000 000
CLASS
C C C C C C C
QTY
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE
DESCRIPTION
REMARKS
VD7-2241-001 000 VD7-2241-001 000 VD7-2241-501 000
33
PARTS LIST
PAGE
29 31 29 29 29 21 23 25 21 21 25 21 21,23,25,27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 23 23 25 25 7 21 15 3 17 15 15 17 5 5 3 15 11 5 5 3 7 17 17 17 5 13 13 13 13 13 11 15 15 11 11 11 11 11 11
PART NO.
CD1-4054-010 D81-1470-000 D82-0643-000 D82-0645-001 D83-0752-000 DA1-9903-000 DA2-0645-000 DA2-0780-000 DA2-2115-000 DA2-2116-000 DA2-2128-010 DA2-2138-000 DA2-2139-000 DA2-2140-000 DA2-2188-000 DA2-2190-000 DA2-2191-010 DA2-2192-000 DA2-2195-000 DA2-2196-000 DA2-2197-000 DA2-2220-000 DA2-2238-000 DA2-2259-000 DA2-2261-000 DA3-1933-000 DA3-2130-000 DA3-2455-000 DA3-2796-000 DA3-3296-000 DA3-3813-000 DA3-5110-000 DA3-5675-000 DA3-5732-000 DA3-5733-000 DA3-5736-000 DA3-5737-000 DA3-5738-000 DA3-5739-000 DA3-5741-000 DA3-5743-000 DA3-5745-000 DA3-5750-000 DA3-5757-000 DA3-5758-000 DA3-5759-000 DA3-5764-000 DA3-5766-000 DA3-5767-000 DA3-5768-000 DA3-5769-000 DA3-5770-000 DA3-5771-000 DA3-5772-000 DA3-5773-000 DA3-5774-000 DA3-5777-000 DA3-5779-000 DA3-5784-000 DA3-5785-000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
C B C C B C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C B C C C C C C B C B B B B C C C C C B C C B B B C B B C B C C C
QTY
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 4 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
DESCRIPTION
COVER, TERMINAL NB-2L STRAP, SHOULDER SS-900 CABLE, AC, EUROPE CABLE, AC, AUSTRALIA WIRELESS CONTROLLER, WL-D87(E) LABEL, S CHASSIS WASHER SCREW SCREW SPRING, COIL (DRUM) GEAR, LOADING S SCREW WASHER WASHER GEAR, WHEEL GEAR, CONNECT LEVER, CAM GUIDE, TENSION CAM GEAR, CAPSTAN BELT, TIMING GEAR, PULLEY LEVER, EJECT BRAKE, MAIN T SCREW SCREW PLATE, GROUND COVER, HOUSING TERMINAL, BATTERY SHOE, ACCESSORY ABSORBER, LENS HOLDER, CVF PANEL 2 ABSORBER, CVF KNOB ABSORBER, CMOS SENSOR HOOK, CASSETTE SPRING, HOOK COVER, BOTTOM KEY, RESET BASE, TRIPOD COVER, REAR COVER, JACK, REAR COVER, JACK FRAME, BOTTOM HOLDER, LENS PLATE, HEATSINK, REAR HEATSINK PLATE, HEATSINK COVER, LCD, B PLATE, GND, LCD INSULATOR, LCD COVER, HINGE, T COVER, HINGE, B COVER, RIGHT KEY, RIGHT, TOP WINDOW, LED, KEY LID, CARD SHAFT, LID, CARD PLATE, HEATSINK WINDOW, LED SHEET, BLIND CUSHION, LCD
REMARKS
NEW
NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW
34
PARTS LIST
PAGE
3 9 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 17 3 15 7 3 7 7 7 11 17 31 31 25 25 25 23 23 23 21 23 7 25 25 25 25 23 23 21 15 25 13 7 15 13 5 7 7 13 15 5 13 5 13 17 3 19
PART NO.
DA3-5787-000 DA3-5814-000 DA3-5818-000 DA3-5819-000 DA3-5820-000 DA3-5821-000 DA3-5823-000 DA3-5824-000 DA3-5826-000 DA3-5827-000 DA3-5830-000 DA3-5831-000 DA3-5832-000 DA3-5833-000 DA3-5841-000 DA3-5842-000 DA3-5843-000 DA3-5845-000 DA3-5856-000 DA3-5858-000 DA3-5868-000 DA3-5869-000 DA3-5870-000 DA3-6415-000 DA3-6849-000 DA3-6850-000 DF1-1686-000 DF1-1687-000 DF1-1688-000 DF1-1693-000 DF1-1694-000 DF1-1695-000 DF1-1703-000 DF1-1704-000 DF1-5205-000 DG1-4497-010 DG1-4501-000 DG1-4502-000 DG1-4503-000 DG1-4504-000 DG1-4505-000 DG1-4506-000 DG3-0978-000 DG3-1545-000 DG3-1671-000 DG3-1836-000 DG3-1837-000 DG3-1838-000 DG3-1839-000 DG3-1840-000 DG3-1842-000 DG3-1843-000 DG3-1844-000 DG3-1845-000 DG3-1846-000 DG3-1849-000 DG3-1850-000 DG3-1855-000 DG3-1861-000 DG3-2115-000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
C C C C C C C C C C C C C B C B C C B C C C B C B B C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C B C C C C C C C C C C C B C C C C B C
QTY
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
PLATE, HEATSINK, TOP PLATE, GND CASE, CVF, BATT HOLDER, CVF LENS HOLDER, CVF KNOB, CVF DIOPTER REFLECTOR, CVF HOLDER, PANEL, CVF CUSHION, CVF LCD DIFFUSER, CVF HOLDER, CASE, BATT KNOB, LOCK, BATT SPRING, BATT LOCK BASE, SHOE GASKET, TOP EYECUP PLATE, PLATE, LABEL, LABEL, CASE, BATT GRAND CAUTION FUSE
REMARKS
NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW
SHIELD, MAIN PCB SHIELD, BOTTOM CUSHION, LCD, GRAY SPACER, LENS CAP, FRONT, 74.5 CAP, REAR, 49.5 DRUM BASE ASSY ROLLER ASSY, GUIDE S ROLLER ASSY, GUIDE T BRAKE ASSY, TENSION RELEASE ASSY, TENSION REVIEW ARM ASSY IDLER ASSY BRAKE ASSY, S HOLDER ASSY, MAIN GUIDE RAIL ASSY CHASSIS ASSY, MAIN MOTOR ASSY, LOADING MOTOR ASSY, CAPSTAN REEL ASSY, S REEL ASSY, T COMPARTMENT ASSY, CASSETTE CONNECTOR ASSY, AAS ROLLER ASSY, PINCH BACK LIGHT ASSY PCB PCB PCB PCB PCB ASSY, ASSY, ASSY, ASSY, ASSY, JACK CVF LCD CARD REAR
NEW
NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW
FPC ASSY, HDMI FPC ASSY, LCD FPC ASSY, CVF COVER ASSY, CASSETTE KEY ASSY, LCD FLASH ASSY HINGE ASSY FRAME ASSY, TOP COVER ASSY, TOP LENS ASSY
35
PARTS LIST
PAGE
7 5 7 15 11 17 7 25 23 23 23 21 29 21 29 *1 7 13 7 17 13 9 9 17
PART NO.
DH2-5670-000 DH2-5671-000 DH2-5675-000 DH2-5676-000 DH2-5677-000 DH9-3057-000 DH9-3062-000 DS1-0192-000 DS1-0193-000 DS1-0198-000 DS1-0199-000 DY1-8501-000 DY1-8531-000 DY1-8610-000 DY1-8777-000 DY1-8901-000 DY1-9008-000 DY1-9104-000 DY1-9106-000 DY1-9108-000 DY1-9110-000 DY1-9111-000 DY1-9112-000 VD7-2241-001 VD7-2241-501 WG2-5297-000 WG2-5301-000 WK1-5164-000 WR1-5137-000 WT3-5087-000 XA1-3170-507 XA1-7140-147 XA1-7170-257 XA1-7170-307 XA1-7170-407 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
C C C C C C C C C C C B C E C C C C C B B C C C C C C C C C F C F F F F F F F C F F F F F F C C
QTY
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 2 1 1 1 1 1 4 3 1 36 12 3 15 9 9 2 3 8 2 4 1 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
FPC, MAIN-JACK FPC, CARD WIRE, REAR WIRE, TERMINAL, BATTERY WIRE, SPEAKER FILTER, UV CAPACITOR, AL-EL, 330V 100UF SPRING, COIL (PINCH) SPRING, COIL (TENSION) SPRING, COIL (T BRAKE) SPRING, COIL (S BRAKE) CHASSIS ASSY, SLIDE DC CABLE (CA-570) DRUM ASSY HOLDER, LITHIUM BATTERY RECORDER UNIT, DMC III(H) LCD, SELECTION PCB ASSY, MAIN CMOS SENSOR ASSY COVER, LCD TOP COVER ASSY, FRONT FOCUS DIAL ASSY AUTO FOCUS ASSY FUSE FUSE LCD, CVF LCD BATTERY, LITHIUM <2ND> SPEAKER CABLE, AC, CHINA SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW, MACH.,PAN HEAD SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW IG METER ASSY LENS, EYEPIECE
REMARKS
*2
15 13 5 11 29
3 21,25,27 13 3,5,7,15,17 3,11,13
15 XA4-9170-357 5,9,11,17,19 XA4-9170-407 15,17 XA4-9170-507 3,5,11,17 XA4-9170-557 3,17 XA9-0610-000 7 7 3 5 3 19 19 15 XA9-1167-000 XA9-1663-000 XA9-1706-000 XA9-1708-000 XA9-1772-000
YB1-0405-000 000 YH8-2056-000 000 YN1-3901-000 000
NEW
36

CANON HV20 E (iPAL) Parts List, Service Manual

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

CANON HV20 E (iPAL) Parts List, Service Manual

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

R2:CONFIDENTIAL Video Product

c CANON INC. 2007

GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

HV20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

Full-spec HD camera system

Superior technology that supports HD with its high image quality

Hi-speed AF (Instant AF)

A fuller array of functions

Easy to carry around, uncomplicated and easy to use

Advanced accessory shoe

How the HV20 E has evolved from the HV10 E

Advanced accessory shoe & audio functions featured

*A fuller range of audio functions

*Shooting for extended periods of time

... See technical description

HV20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

1-2 Product Specifications

HV20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

1-3 Function and Performance List

HV20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

HV20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

HV20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

HV20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

HV20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

HV20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

DV Video signals Quantized bits 2-2 Audio signal recording DV

HV20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

Vapor-deposited metal tape 6.35mm 7m or 5.3m

HV20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

HV20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

5-6 Exposure control 5-6-1 Program AE

5-6-2 Metering system Tape recording

5-6-4 Electronic shutter 5-6-4-1 AUTO mode HDV/DV mode

HV20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

5-7-2 AF range finding area In tape mode In card mode

5-7-3 Range-finding frame display In Tape mode In Card mode

5-7-7 Forced infinity setting 5-7-8 Focus assist

HV20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

HV20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

5-15-2 Data code Date and time

Tape recording Card recording

5-15-7 5-15-8 5-15-9

5-15-10 AEB shooting

5-15-11 Still image check time setting

5-15-15 Shooting assist a. Zebra b. Peaking 5-15-16 Marker displays

HV20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

HV20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

HV20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

Card/Camera LW (1920 1080) L (2048 1536) M (1440 1080) S (640 480)

6-7-3 File name and folder name

Card volume label

HV20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

6-7-6 Usable memory cards miniSD memory card

HV20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

Card playback (VCR/Card)

Printer manufacturer Printer specifications CP specifications

Other manufacturer PictBridge specifications only

Suitable printer Printer specifications when connected to HV20 E

CP-200/3002nd/220/330/ BJ-895PD/535PD/F890PD, PIXUS450i/470PD/50i 400/500/600/710/510

PictBridge control When the printer is connected

( ) : The printer is supported

HV20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

6-10-2 Power automatic stop function 6-10-3 DV conversion function